JP2022115012A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine), an enclosed-type game machine, and a rotary-drum game machine (slot machine) having a characteristic in display means.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided comprising first vibration means 2 capable of executing a first vibration operation (accessory vibration performance A) and display means 208, wherein the display means 208 starts displaying a first image 2hg related to the first vibration means 2 before starting the execution of the first vibration operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by pinball game machines (pachinko machines), enclosed game machines, and reel game machines (slot machines).

Conventionally, pachinko machines and slot machines are known as one of the game machines. In a pachinko machine, it is common to provide obstacles that change the direction in which game balls fall in the game area of the game board, winning openings that allow game balls to win, starting openings, variable winning openings, etc. . When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a prize ball (for example, Patent Document 1).

Some of such game machines are equipped with display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-200302

However, conventional game machines have room for improvement in display means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic display means.

The amusement machine of the present invention that solves the above object is
a first vibrating means capable of performing a first vibrating motion;
display means;
A game machine comprising
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibrating means before execution of the first vibrating action is started.
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic display means.

1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. An example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of the special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of the special pattern 2, and (c) is a decoration. An example of a design is shown, and (d) is a figure showing an example of a normal design stop display design. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a second sub-control unit command reception interrupt 3 is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of second sub-controller image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a character ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. (a) is a table summarizing the types of big wins and game states after the big win game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps an example which transfers from a normal stage to a buttocks stage. 13 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12; FIG. It is a diagram showing an example step by step from the sea zone to the sky zone to a big hit. 15 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where power is immediately restored after a power failure occurs while a decorative pattern is being displayed. It is a figure which shows an example of an event prefetch notice step by step. 18 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 17; FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 18; It is a figure which shows the modification of an event prefetch notice step by step. (a) is a diagram showing a table relating to a role object vibration effect A, and (b) is a figure showing a table relating to a role object vibration effect B. FIG. It is a figure which each shows in steps the case where the role object vibration production|presentation A is performed, and the case where it is not performed. It is a figure which shows another example step by step continuing from FIG.22(3). It is a figure which shows step by step another example in which the role object vibration production|presentation B is performed. It is the figure which showed the table regarding button vibration production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of button vibration production|presentation in steps. (a) is a diagram showing a table for background effects, and (b) is a diagram showing a table for mini character effects. It is a figure which shows an example of a mini character production|presentation in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which the character object vibration production|presentation B and a mini character production|presentation are performed. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which the time saving game state ended a little before the time saving game state ended and shifted to the non time saving game state. 31 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 30; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 31; FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32; It is a figure which shows in steps an example in which there is no pullback period. (a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not met, and (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs that are selected when a predetermined condition is met. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of songs to be selected after a predetermined condition has been satisfied even once; FIG. 31 is a diagram showing stepwise an example different from the example shown in FIG. 30 continued from FIG. 30(h). It is a diagram showing in stages an example in which the first pending icon h21 of the pending icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the last special figure symbol variation display capable of maintaining the time saving gaming state is completed is in a golden display mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which operates the operation key unit 190 during the big-hit game started without predetermined conditions being satisfied. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player's side); FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is the figure which represented. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. Examples of display patterns of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of a special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of a special pattern 2, and (c) shows a decorative pattern. An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a normal design. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for judging the suitability of a normal figure, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for judging special figures 1 and 2, and (c) is a special figure determination FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of an application distribution table; It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-controller of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-controller main processing, (b) is the first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing It is a flowchart and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-controller of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-controller main processing, (b) is the second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing 4 is a flow chart, where (c) is a flow chart of a second sub-controller timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flow chart of a second sub-controller image control process; (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a character ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. It is a figure which shows in steps an example of the production|presentation centering on the decorative design display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending icon displayed on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42. FIG. It is a figure which shows the decoration with which the 2nd production|presentation movable body 8 is provided. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of the ready-to-win title are related. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device by a zone effect; It is a figure which shows step by step an example of the production|presentation which the display mode of a pending|holding icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped production|presentation lamp 206 are related, and super reach is performed. It is a figure which shows in steps an example of the production|presentation which the display mode of a pending|holding icon and the display mode of the decoration with which the 2nd production|effect movable body 8 is related is related. It is a figure which shows in steps an example of the production|presentation similar to the production|presentation which the 2nd production|presentation movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 operate|moves. (a) is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table, (b) is a diagram showing a light emission color determination table of a light emitting unit 71, and (c) is a diagram showing a lord's kimono color determination table. . 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the front side (player's side); FIG.

1 to 41, a game table (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel game machine such as a slot machine 100) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. 1 to 41 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 1 to 41 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 41, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

<Overall composition>
First, using FIG. 1, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is established, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a launcher. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the side of the player).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island facility, etc.) provided in a game machine installation business office.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a vertically rectangular door member which has a locking function and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of the store (amusement parlor) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body open sensor 104S for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be freely opened and closed. is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, a lamp using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of being opened and closed with a locking function. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 for detecting that the ball storage tray door 108 is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate has an upper plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball ejection button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in a lower tray 128 by operation to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box), and a game board for discharging game balls guided to a launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball shooting handle 134 that shoots out to the game area 124, a production button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and built in the production button 136, and the production A button lamp 138 for causing a button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade to lend a ball, and an instruction for returning the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 to perform and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 is also provided. The operation key unit 190 is provided with an enter button 1903 between an upper button 1901 and a lower button 1902, and this enter button 1903 may function as a second effect button.

The shooting device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and has a shooting rod 146 that rotates when the ball shooting handle 134 is operated by the player, and a shooting mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the shooting rod 146. , provided. While the ball shooting handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, the shooting device 110 shoots the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined shooting period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launching means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 . Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted from FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as seen from the back side.

A ball tank 150, which has an upwardly opening opening in the upper back of the pachinko machine 100 and is used to temporarily store game balls, is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the game balls temporarily retained are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152.例文帳に追加In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that imparts a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4). A game ball that has passed through this payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches an upper tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the condition for giving is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 housing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that controls the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the performance based on the processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400 A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to performance, a payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to payout of game balls. 4), and a payout board case 172 housing a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by the operation of a game clerk; ), a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric game machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of the game clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A CR interface unit 606 for transmission and reception is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192 , a setting change button 194 and a character ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main substrate 156 . In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated under the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set in a setting change mode. can move to In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while confirming this. It should be noted that even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The character item ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 10A, the character ratio/setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged vertically and a single-digit 7-segment LED on the right side. , the character ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the character ratio (YH) and the continuous character ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The character ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red single-color LED, but it may be one capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least part of the role product ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162 . Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side is sometimes called the front or front, and the far side is sometimes called the back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right when viewed from the front. An arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the upper side, and the lower side may be referred to as the lower side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 .

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. is the center of rotation, the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 and set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. Sometimes.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201 . The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the main body 201 . When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, it is possible to carry out error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop to disable the continuation of the game, etc.). The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104 . The area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 in the game area 124 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the shot game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be called a non-game area. The play area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the shooting intensity of the game ball is maximized can be called a game area 124 . The game area 124 may include an area through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like in the game area 124 . The game area 124 may be called a flowing area in that the game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be called a non-flowing area in that the game balls do not flow down during the game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a flowing area, but an area where game balls do not flow due to the presence of a production device or the like may be called a non-flowing area.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 124 . Below the game area 124, a normal design display device 210, a first special design display device 212, a second special design display device 214, a normal design reservation lamp 216, a first special design reservation lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 is provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal design may be referred to as "general figure" and the special design may be referred to as "special figure".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display regions: a left pattern display region 208a, a middle pattern display region 208b, a right pattern display region 208c and a performance display region 208d. The and right design display areas 208c display different decorative designs, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effects. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. FIG. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, a liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The normal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games that are reserved (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation game is held to a predetermined number (eg, four) making it possible to The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games. It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol reservation lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). making it possible.

In addition, a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-handed display lamp RL, and a high accuracy medium lamp HL are also provided. The time saving middle lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the normal figure is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew) described later is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The high-probability medium lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the game state is a high-probability state in which a big win is likely to occur, or that the game state will be in a high-probability state.

Around the decorative pattern display device 208, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal figure start opening 228, a first special figure start opening 230, and a second special figure start opening 232. , a variable winning opening 234 is provided.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is called a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the gaming area 124 is called a general winning opening 226b. When the ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are awarded. When the ball is ejected to the upper tray 126 and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it. For example, 1 ball is discharged to the upper tray 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these constructions, prize balls are paid out to the player based on winning. In this embodiment, different ball detection sensors detect game balls that have entered the general winning opening 226a and game balls that have entered the general winning opening 226b. Further, when a plurality of general winning holes 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entering game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning holes 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entering game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. Balls entered into the general winning holes 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal figure starting port 228 is configured with a device for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, called a gate or through chucker, and is located on the right side of the game board 200 in this embodiment. One is placed in the Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the normal figure starting opening 228 are not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 , the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal pattern fluctuation game by the normal pattern display device 210 .

The first special figure starting port 230 is arranged only one at the lower center of the game board 200 in this embodiment. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper tray 126. Along with discharging to , the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. In addition, the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is discharged to the game island side after being guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the first special figure starting port 230 when hitting to the right. And, in this embodiment, the specification to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine with such specifications may be called a "special 2 priority variation machine" etc.) And It is

The second special figure starting port 232 is configured by an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230, and has a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. In the middle, it is impossible to enter the ball, and when the normal pattern variation game is won and the normal pattern display device 210 stops displaying the winning pattern, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. Along with that, the special figure fluctuation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. A ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal pattern starting port 228 (by a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the normal pattern starting port 228 when hitting to the left. . Therefore, as a general rule, there is no winning in the normal figure variation game during left-handed hitting, and therefore, as a general rule, the blade member 232a is not opened or closed. On the other hand, when hitting to the right, it is possible to expect the game ball to enter the normal figure starting port 228, so that the normal figure fluctuation game may be won and the blade member 232a may open and close. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting right.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200 . The variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (eg, opening time of 29 seconds, closing time of 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (eg, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper tray 126 as prize balls.

In this embodiment, the variable prize winning port 234 and the general prize winning port 226b are integrated with the ball entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. FIG. The ball-entering unit U1 is further provided with a V-shutter VS and a V-pass switch VC. The V-passing switch VC is opened upward and allows game balls to pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects a passing game ball. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and moves back and forth by means of a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by a drive circuit 334 . When the V-shutter VS moves forward (corresponding to the closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V-passing switch VC. It becomes possible to pass through the pass switch VC. A game ball that enters the variable winning port 234 and passes through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided forward, rolls up to the V shutter VS, passes the V pass switch VC, or fails to pass. In some cases, the player is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. - 特許庁The V-pass switch VS is included in various sensors 320 (see FIG. 4), and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322 . In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that the V prize has been won.

In this embodiment, the V-shutter VS is maintained in a closed state (advanced state) from the start of the jackpot game to a specific round (for example, the final round), and the V-shutter VS opens (retreats) in the specific round. , V prize can be obtained. If the V winning prize can be obtained, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big win game ends, and if the V prize cannot be obtained, the control state changes to the special figure low probability state after the big winning game ends. remains That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the passage of the game ball through the V passage switch VS.

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball hitting direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening An out port 240 is provided for discharging the balls or the like that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with the intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The shot mallet is passed through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124.例文帳に追加Then, the ball that reaches the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc. Exit (1st special figure start opening 230, 2nd special figure start opening 232), without winning any prize opening or start opening, or just passing through normal figure start opening 228 Reach 240. In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed in the lower side of the space portion 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout for detecting passage of a game ball received in the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104 . Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have won prizes in various prize-winning ports) are received in the discharged ball receiving port and are passed through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via.

An upper effect device 2 and a lower effect device 3 are arranged in the upper part and the lower part of the game area 124, respectively, and side effect devices 4 are arranged in the left and right sides, respectively. In the case of this embodiment, these production devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104 .

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main control unit 300 according to commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 , a payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling the launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. there is

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the main control section 300 as a whole. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit contains two counters). is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302. FIG.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second 2 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a predetermined pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general figure display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, Normal figure holding lamp 216, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp etc.) and a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and a predetermined movable member, for example, as a normal electric accessory Various solenoids 332 including driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure start opening 232, door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, and driving means for driving the V shutter VS and a drive circuit 334 for control are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318 .

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that receives this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and converts the latched value to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Also, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 .

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the machine.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply. is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the Communication with 1 sub control unit 400 and payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. good too.

Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main controller 300 . The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Also, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402 . The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp driving circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp driving circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452 . Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 .

In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and various (upper, lower, side) production devices 2 to 4 and the like. A drive circuit 422 for the sound, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 4, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect pressing of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (video display processor) that reads image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. 516 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is also connected to a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, image display data, and the like. In this embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is configured by a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of retaining the storage state even when power is cut off. As a result, for example, information for displaying a display relating to the history of big hits can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. A RAM in which stored information volatilizes when power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and provides prize balls or ball rental based on control signals output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of has been completed. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via a CR interface unit 606 . In addition, the payout control unit 600 provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Rental ball information or the like indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600 . The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. These sensors detect when 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300 .

The shooting control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stopping of shooting output by the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball shooting handle 134 by the player, which is output by a shooting intensity output circuit provided in the ball shooting handle 134. A firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 is controlled, and a ball feeding device 634 that feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the firing device 110 is controlled based on the control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. I will explain the types of Toku-zu and Universal-zu.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on the condition that the first start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start opening 232. The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on the condition that the second start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been thrown. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats all the lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure Variation game) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the central one segment "variation display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop pattern mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time decided before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 , the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "special figure 1 or 2 variable display" to the stop display of the special figure 1 or 2 stop design mode may be referred to as special figure variable display. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in succession.

FIG. 5(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. In this FIG. 5(a), three kinds of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure c" are shown. In FIG. 5(a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special figure a” and “special figure b”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 . "Special figure a" is a 3-round (R) definite variable big hit pattern that is scheduled to be definite variable acquisition, and "special figure b" is a 3R normal big hit pattern that has no chance of definite variable acquisition. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, variable probability acquisition (transition to the special figure high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, when entering the third round which is the final round of the jackpot game, the V shutter VS opens (retreats) and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS. be possible. If the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS (if the V winning prize is won), after the big hit game ends, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, and the special figure high probability state that has shifted is the big hit game. It is maintained while the pattern variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times after the end. In this embodiment, if the V shutter VS is opened, there is enough time to maintain the open state, the possibility of the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS is high, and the "special figure a" is a probability variable acquisition can be said to be a planned big hit (the same applies to "special figure A" and "special figure B" to be described later). On the other hand, when the special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the third round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, is entered, and the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS. The control state remains in the special low probability state after the jackpot game ends. In this way, the transition to the special figure high probability state required V winning, but the transition to the general pattern high probability state is started on the condition that the big hit game ends. That is, if you hit the jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the general pattern high probability state. It is maintained for 120 times, and 50 times in the case of special b.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of lost symbol (“special figure c”) is prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 .

FIG. 5(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. FIG. In this FIG. 5 (b), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown, and two kinds of special figures are big hit symbols ("special figure A" and "special figure D"). Figure B”). "Special figure A" is a 10R definite variable big hit pattern scheduled for definite variable acquisition, and "Special figure B" is a 2R definite variable big hit pattern scheduled for definite variable acquisition. That is, if the special figure A wins the V prize in the 10th round, after the big hit game is over, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state normal figure high probability state, and after the big hit game is finished This state is maintained while the pattern variation display is performed 120 times. If the special figure B wins the V prize in the second round, after the big win game is over, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state general figure high probability state, and after the big win game is over, the special figure pattern. This state is maintained while the variable display is performed 120 times here as well.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols (“special figure C” and “special figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 . The "special figure C" is the same general losing pattern as the "special figure c", but the "special figure D" is a special pattern called a time-saving design, which will be described later in detail.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a special figure variation game is a big hit is determined by hardware random number lottery, and the big winning pattern to be stopped is determined by software random number lottery. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game of a specific period, it is determined whether or not the "sudden reduction in working hours" is won by lottery of hardware random numbers, and if the "sudden reduction in working hours" is won, the second special figure display The device 214 stop-displays the "time saving pattern". Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the normal pattern high probability state. Ordinary figure high probability state is called a time saving game state (power support state). Here, the time-saving gaming state is a predetermined higher advantage for the player than the non-time-saving gaming state, such as by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electric sapo state" is a state related to the normal game, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to the special game or a state related to the normal game and the special game. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a time saving game state and a general pattern high probability state. In the general pattern high probability state, it becomes easier to win the general pattern variation game than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the normal pattern fluctuation game is 1/100 in the normal pattern low probability state (non-time saving game state), while in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving game state) it rises to 99/100. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-time-saving game state (normal figure variable short). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the variation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Also, in the time-saving game state, compared to the non-time-saving game state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 tends to be longer (extension of electric chew open period). For example, the electric chew open period of 0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, compared to the non-time-saving game state, the blade member 232a tends to open more (increase in the number of electric chew openings). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game state per winning to the normal figure start port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew open period and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. In addition, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-time-saving game state is maintained. Especially in a jackpot game, if game balls are picked up by electric chews with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls entering the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is In addition, in this embodiment, when simply described as "non-time-saving game state", during the jackpot game shall be excluded.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the normal pattern probability change, the normal pattern variation and short period, the extension of the electric chew open period, and the increase in the number of electric chew openings are performed, but at least one of these is performed. For example, the player may be in a state of high advantage, and may be in a time-saving game state. In this case, in each of the time-saving game states of a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving, which will be described later, even if you change what is executed among normal figure probability change, normal figure variable short, electric chew open period extension and electric chew open number increase good. For example, in the case of a short time, normal figure fixed change, normal figure variable short, electric chew open period extension and electric chew open number increase are all performed, but in b time short and c short time, normal figure fixed change, normal figure variable short, Any one or two of the extension of the electric chew open period and the increase in the number of electric chew open times may be executed. Alternatively, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases, and if either one of the extension of the electric chew open period or the increase in the number of electric chew openings is performed, it may be a time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which game balls are easy to enter. This special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state over a long period of time in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure a", "special figure A" and "special figure B" are stopped and displayed, the special figure is displayed 120 times after the jackpot game is finished. The time-saving game state (ordinary pattern high probability state) is maintained until is performed, and shifts to a non-time-saving game state (normal pattern low probability state) at the 121st time. In addition, when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the variation display of the special figure is performed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game to be performed thereafter. In the first time, it shifts to a non-time-saving game state (ordinary figure low probability state). It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the jackpot pattern of all of the special figures, after the end of the jackpot game, to shift to the time-saving game state, but even if a jackpot pattern (non-time-saving jackpot pattern) that does not shift to the time-saving game state is provided Well, when it becomes a big hit with a non-time-saving big hit pattern, it may be kept in the non-time-saving game state without shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big win game. Further, in addition to the big-hit symbols, small-hit symbols may be prepared. In the small-hit game, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 operates predetermined times (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. It only stays open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per actuation. In the opening of the door member 234a for a small hit, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the door member 234a in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is obtained. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the control state before the start of the small win game is restored.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of the decorative pattern. There are 13 types of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 13". That the ball entered the special figure 1 starter opening 230 or the special figure 2 starter opening 232, that is, the first starter sensor detected that the ball entered the special figure 1 starter opening 230, or the special figure 2 On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting port 232, each of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208 is displayed. "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → "Decoration" "Variation display of patterns" is performed. That is, the decorative design display device 208 variably displays the decorative design separately from the first special design display device 212 and the second special design display device 214 . Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying that it is a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special b"), decorative patterns of the same number are positioned in the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and in the middle pattern display area 208b. stops displaying a combination of decorative patterns in which the decoration 13 is positioned (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 13-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2"). On the other hand, in the case of notifying the definite variable jackpot (3R definite variable jackpot of "special figure a", 10R definite variable jackpot of "special figure A", 2R definite variable jackpot of "special figure B"), in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped. In addition, when notifying the "special figure c" or "special figure C" of the missing pattern, the pattern display areas 208a to 208c display a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described so far (for example, a random eyes) to stop displaying. Furthermore, in the case of notifying that the player has won the lottery in a short time, three "decorations 11" are displayed side by side instead of the combination of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10".

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a zone effect may be executed as one of the effects. The zone effect is a preview effect in which the background displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to the background corresponding to the zone. There are a plurality of timings for starting the execution of the zone effect, and it may start when the decorative symbols start to fluctuate. When the empty zone performance is started at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, three "decorations 12" are arranged and displayed at the timing when the preceding decorative pattern variation display is finished. Henceforth, "decoration 12" may be called a zone entry pattern. Note that the zone effect may include an effect in which three zone entry patterns are displayed side by side. That is, in this case, the execution start timing of the zone effect is the timing when the three zone entry patterns are displayed side by side.

Hereinafter, in the decorative design display device 208, the display from the start of the "decorative design variable display" to the stop display of the decorative design in the stopped design mode may be referred to as the decorative design variable display. The variable display of decorative patterns is controlled by the second sub-controller 500 .

FIG. 5(d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes of the normal pattern: "normal pattern A", which is a winning pattern, and "normal pattern B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the detection by the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the normal map display device 210 lights up all seven segments, and turns on the central one segment. Perform "Normal figure fluctuation display" (Normal figure fluctuation game) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, either one of the winning pattern "normal pattern A" and the losing pattern "normal pattern B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5(d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variable display of the normal pattern" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal pattern may be referred to as the variable display of the normal pattern.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round determination random number, a special figure electric sapo decision random number, and a special figure design random number. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, special figure winning random numbers, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area that stores the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure that is divided into the maximum number (in this example, four) areas that can hold the start of the success/failure determination (lottery), A random number storage area for normal maps is also provided. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are set as one set, and these starting information are stored one by one in order of winning (reservation order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 detects the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it monitors whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), step Proceed to S107. Even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, The output port to the first sub-controller 400) outputs a clear signal, and the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308 is performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps in order to execute the initialization process.

If it is determined not to return to the state before the power interruption (step S109; No), is the reason for this the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that there has been an operation). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is turned ON (step S115). If it is determined that there is (step S115; Yes), setting change processing is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor in the role product ratio/setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments of the setting monitor are incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor indicate "6". When it is set, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities can be selected. is determined. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194 . In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the character ratio/setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Also, in the present embodiment, six levels of setting 1 to 6 are set, but settings other than six levels may be used, and settings may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is held and the held setting value is displayed. good too.

If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No) or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is turned ON ( Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is executed to initialize the basic circuit 302 (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read. All areas) are added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0 to calculate the checksum, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes initialization processing to initialize the pachinko machine 100 . In this initialization processing, interrupt inhibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Note that in this embodiment, even if the initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Further, here, the normal return command and the setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. This return-to-normal command is a command indicating that the initialization processing (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the general pattern winning random number counter and the special pattern random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of step S121 except while the timer interrupt processing that starts at predetermined intervals is being performed.

On the other hand, in step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (permanent setting) to the stack pointer. Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment). A partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320 . Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) before the last time is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308 and stored in the two-previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. memorize to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control section timer interrupt processing, which repeats activation at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball begins to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is this time detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that a prize has been won when a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal the previous time, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is converted into predetermined prize winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal from the time before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal this time). information indicating that it is), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure start opening 230 and the second special figure start opening 232, or the normal figure start opening 228 It is judged that there was passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the first start opening sensor that detects the entry ball to the first special figure start opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that there is a winning to the start port 230, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning to the first special figure start port 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the winning determination pattern information described above, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230 . Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal the time before last, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a winning, it is not determined that there has been a winning until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches with the pattern information, then it is determined whether or not it matches with the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update process and basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated, and then used by the main control unit 300, the normal figure winning random value and Update the random number counter for generating each special random number. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. As a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the memory area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for general pattern winning that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308. If the value is equal to the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for normal figure winning, and In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers has made the next round. Keep In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for normal figure winning random number generation has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one round The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal pattern display pattern update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the display of the pattern on the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, and the second special pattern display device 214. Various types of timers, including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time for variable/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning opening 234, 226 or starting opening 230, 232, the value of the number of winning balls storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is updated in the RAM 308. Read out, add 1, and set in the original prize number storage area.

Also, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired. A plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 .

In step S219 executed subsequent to step S217, payout request number transmission processing is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. , power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and encryption in bits 0-3 It shows the number of payout requests after processing.

In step S221, a general pattern state update process is performed. This general pattern state update process performs one process out of a plurality of processes corresponding to the general pattern state. For example, in the middle of the general pattern fluctuation display (the value of the general pattern display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), in the general pattern state update process, the 7 segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210 is repeatedly lit and extinguished. Extinguishment drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a normal pattern variation display (normal pattern variation game).

In addition, in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the general pattern fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the general pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the pattern The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. 7-segment LED lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general pattern state update process. Here, along with performing the lighting/extinguishing drive control described above, a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal map stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5(d)) and the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5(d)). display. Furthermore, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the normal chart stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the fixedly displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal pattern variation game.

Also, if the result of the normal pattern variation game is hit, as described later, the normal pattern per flag is turned on. When this normal pattern per flag is on, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the normal pattern stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting normal figure operation in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds) In addition, information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 .

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 500 m seconds), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing drive of 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the blade closing time provided in the RAM308.

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for blade closing time management changes from 1 to 0), the general pattern non-operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, as described later, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on. When this general pattern loss flag is on, even in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above has ended (the value of the general pattern stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal chart non-operation is set. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, normal figure related lottery processing is performed. In this general figure related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the second special figure start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not in operation), and of the reserved general figure fluctuation game If the number is 1 or more, a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area determines whether the result of the general pattern variation game is winning or not. A winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON when winning is determined. If the prize is not won, the winning flag is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is displayed from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variable display of a figure, and this variable display time is stored in a normal figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a normal figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game is stored in the normal pattern reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time the hit determination is made, from the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this normal pattern pending number storage area. Also, the random number used for the hit judgment is erased.

Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased starting information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and determines in advance the stop pattern and the fluctuation time before the propriety determination process, and the prior determination The result (special figure lookahead result) is stored in the lookahead result storage unit in RAM308.

Then, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure status update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update processing, according to the state of special figure 2, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display pattern update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 It performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing. By performing this control, the second special figure display device 214 performs the variation display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a miss flag, a special pattern probability change flag and a normal pattern probability change flag. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 2 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer becomes 0 from 1), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on is special figure A shown in FIG. D so as to be in each mode, perform lighting / extinguishment drive control of the 7 segment LED that constitutes the second special figure display device 214, and perform setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in the setting area of the RAM 308 . By performing this control, the second special figure display device 214, 10R probability variation jackpot design (special figure A), 2R probability variation jackpot design (special figure B), loss design (special figure C), time saving design (special figure D ) to confirm and display one of the symbols.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the special figure 2 fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variation game is notified to the player. If the number of times of time saving stored in the number of times of saving time stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of saving time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the jackpot game (during the special game state).

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is, after additionally storing in the RAM308 as information to be included in the command data described later, the process is terminated.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 will start a big hit. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. FIG. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize winning port 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, in the special figure 2 state update process in the final round (10 rounds for special figure A, 2 rounds for special figure B) of the final round of the jackpot with probability variation, a predetermined open period (for example, 10 seconds) V shutter A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in an open state is output to the VS open/close drive solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332), and the open period is set in the storage area of the V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. set the information to be displayed. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (timing when the value of the V shutter open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening and closing drive of the V shutter VS ( A part of the various solenoids 332) outputs a signal to hold the V-shutter VS in the closed state. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and that the probability variation has been obtained (V prize effect period (for example, 3 seconds)), the RAM 308 stores Information indicating the V winning effect period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 2 waiting time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the V winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (9 rounds or 1 round except for the first time), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds ) That is, in order to set the waiting period during which the image for informing the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed, the effect is stored in the memory area of the timer for managing the effect standby time provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the waiting period.

Also, if the 10R big hit flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in RAM 308 to turn on. Even when the 2R big hit flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage part provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. to turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time saving number (950 times) is set to the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM308 is turned on.

The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player by shortening the time from the end of the big win in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big win. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern probability change). In the general pattern high probability state, the probability of hitting in the general pattern variation game is higher than in the general pattern low probability state. In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the general pattern high probability state, compared to the general pattern low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a tends to open more than in the general pattern low probability state. The state in which any of these normal map fixed variable, normal map variable short, and electric chu opening is set is called the electric sapo (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Also, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This is, when the normal pattern high probability state is in the jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game. This is intended to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit increases and the gambling nature increases.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 2 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer becomes 1 to 0), Set special figure 2 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update processing) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, according to the state of special figure 1, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 variable display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED that constitutes the first special figure display device 212 It performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing. By performing this control, the first special figure display device 212 performs the variation display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, flags such as a 3R big hit flag A, a 3R big hit flag B and a losing flag are prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 1 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 0 from 1), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on When the special figure a shown in FIG. 5 (a), the special figure b when the 3R jackpot flag B is on, and the special figure c when the off flag is on, the first special figure The lighting and extinguishing drive control of the 7 segment LED that constitutes the display device 212 is performed, and the setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is in the setting area of the RAM 308 is performed. By performing this control, the first special figure display device 212 is one of the 3R probability variation jackpot design (special figure a), 3R normal jackpot design (special figure b), and losing design (special figure c). Perform confirmation display.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (eg 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the special figure 1 fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variation game is notified to the player. If the number of times of time saving stored in the number of times of saving time stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of saving time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the jackpot game (during the special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is the special figure 1. The processing ends after additionally storing the special figure 1 identification information indicating that there is in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later.

Also, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 will start a big hit. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the value of the special figure 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. FIG. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize winning port 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, if the 3R big hit flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3 rounds), a predetermined open period (for example, 10 seconds) V shutter VS solenoid for opening and closing drive ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the open state is output to a part of various solenoids 332 , and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the V shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 . Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (timing when the value of the V shutter open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening and closing drive of the V shutter VS ( A part of the various solenoids 332) outputs a signal to hold the V-shutter VS in the closed state. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for the period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and that the probability variation has been obtained (V prize effect period (for example, 3 seconds)), the RAM 308 stores Information indicating the V winning effect period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 1 waiting time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the V winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds except for the first time), and in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the decorative pattern display device In order to set the waiting period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the big hit by 208 will end, information indicating the waiting period for the effect is stored in the memory area of the timer for managing the waiting time for the effect provided in the RAM 308. set. Also, if the 3R big hit flag A is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage part provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving provided in the RAM 308 is set. turn on the flag. Even when the 3R big hit flag B is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (50 times) is set in the time saving number storage part provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving time provided in the RAM 308 is set. turn on the flag. It should be noted that, in the special figure 1 state update process, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is not set to ON.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 1 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special figure 1 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 1 state update process when the special figure 1 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 ends, this time, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here first, the special figure-related lottery process (special figure 2-related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1-related lottery process ) is performed (step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 fluctuation games are not performed, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 states are both inactive and reserved special figure 2 It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not played, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and reserved. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

As for these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation game and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variation game does not start variation because the special figure 2 variation game is in the process of varying first. Also, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the reservation of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, by the decorative design display device 208, the notification of the result of the determination of the special figure fluctuation game is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start port 232 , the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230 is given priority. In this exemplary embodiment, a special figure variation game with a high degree of advantage (in this example, a special figure 2 variation game) is performed with priority over a special figure variation game with a low degree of advantage (in this example, a special figure 1 variation game). For this reason, it may become easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the game state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 starting information (special Figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number etc. in the acquired special figure 2 start information, using the success/failure determination table stored in ROM 306 A decision is made as to whether the game is a big hit or a loss (hit/fail judgment). Also, even in the success/failure determination of the special figure 1, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the decided propriety determination result of the special figure 2 The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display are determined. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of the success/failure determination, the acquired special figure fluctuation time determination random number, etc., was stored in the ROM 306 Determine the variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 using various tables.

The main control unit 300, after retrieving the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and special 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 reservation number of the FIG. 2 reservation number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 fluctuation game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is preferentially digested over the reservation of the special figure 1 Toku-zu 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but the Toku-zu 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage is started with priority over the Toku-zu 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage, and the reservation of Toku-zu 1 is It may be a special figure 1 priority variation that is digested with priority over holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage and the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won. It may be a start-up winning order variation that starts in order. In the start-up winning order change, the upper limit of the pending number is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so compared to the priority change where the upper limit of the pending number is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 You may be able to increase the hold limit by

In the above description, the lottery process and variable game related to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure status update By performing the process and the special figure related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it may be configured to simultaneously change a plurality of special figures. In addition, when a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special symbols are provided in the decorative design display device 208, or the lottery results of the respective special symbols are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the respective lottery results separately, or one display may display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when the variation regarding a plurality of special symbols is performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits. Command type (in this example form, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, information that can specify the type of command such as a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc., and symbol variation stop ( In the case of a rotation stop) command, it includes values of various big hit flags and loss flags. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 start opening 230 is won, whether or not the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won, whether or not the variable winning opening 234 is won, etc. including. In the case of the lookahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the type of special figures 1 and 2, the number of lookaheads stored in the number of lookahead storage area, and the stop pattern stored in the lookahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information.

In addition, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the command data, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related lottery process selected by Set information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags and loss flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data, which is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the reserved special figure Set information indicating the number of 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Set information indicating the number of 1 variation game or special figure 2 variation game. In the above-described big winning opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data, notice information (advance notice information, false advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of predetermined errors, such as the presence or absence of the front frame door open error or the lower tray full error, is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is added to the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the first special figure display device through the drive circuits 324, 326, 330 212, the second special figure display device 214, the display data to be output to various state display units 328, etc., is set to the output port of I/O310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310. FIG.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt ending process is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. return to On the other hand, in step S243, when power is restored, a specific variable and stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. after that, it enters the HALT state.

Next, processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. First, in step S301 of FIG. 8A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 300 .

In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform processing to change to

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command for the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416 .

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for various lamps 442, 452 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read out in step S309 includes a command to the various effect devices 2 to 4, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 8B is a flowchart of first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by CPU 404 of first sub-controller 400 . This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal from the main controller 300 . In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

FIG. 8(c) is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S341 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main process, and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, transmission of the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission processing (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing, and other processing for updating the random value for effect etc.

Next, processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described. FIG. 9(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. First, in step S401 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the performance data corresponding to this command (the performance data by the decorative pattern display device 208) is read out from the ROM (not shown), etc., and the performance data is updated. is required, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 9B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-controller 400 . In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-controller 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 9(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM explained in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

FIG. 9D is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-controller main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers 1 and 2 of the VRAM 518 . As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 . Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, specific configurations of the character item ratio/setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the character ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. is.

As described above, the character ratio/setting display 196 includes a character ratio monitor and a setting monitor. The character ratio monitor displays the continuous character ratio (RY) and the character ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current set value.

Here, the continuous role ratio refers to the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired, which is due to the operation of the said role when the role is continuously operated (i.e., variable winning during the jackpot game It means the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning to the variable winning hole 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the role ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the role (that is, the second special figure start port 232 and the variable winning port 234 are opened and won It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous role product ratio, when it is determined that the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous role product ratio is displayed blinking, and then to output a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 . In addition, it may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156 . As a result, the model application test for the game machine may be smoothly performed.

In addition, as a result of calculating the role ratio, if it is determined that the role ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the role ratio is displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ). Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the role product ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In this embodiment, when the continuous role product ratio or the role product ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED blinks. good too.

As shown in FIG. 10B, the DIP switch board 198 is provided with eight DIP switches. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each DIP switch can be read to change the appearance probability of the effect. Appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc. can be set.

Next, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described, although there are parts that overlap with what has been described so far.

FIG. 11(a) is a table summarizing the types of big wins and game states after the big win game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. The probability of hitting the jackpot at high probability is 1/91. When the setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/315, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/90. When the setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/310, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/88. When the setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/87. When the setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/300, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/85. When the setting 6 is selected, the jackpot probability at the special figure low probability is 1/295, and the jackpot probability at the special figure high probability is 1/84. The higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the jackpot.

In addition, the normal pattern winning probability at the normal pattern low probability is 1/100, while the normal pattern winning probability at the normal pattern high probability is 99/100.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the special figure 1, the breakdown of the special figure a and the special figure b is even (50% each), and in the special figure 2, the breakdown of the special figure A and the special figure B is 7:3.

Also, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS opens only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V passing switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operating region ON), it becomes with variable probability, so the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operating region OFF), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS is not opened even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS opens only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. In the special figure B, the V shutter VS is opened only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. Whether it is a special figure A or a special figure B, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operation area ON), the game state after the jackpot game ends is a special figure high probability normal figure It becomes a high probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC (in the case of the variable probability operating region OFF), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is , It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times.

In addition, after the special figure high probability general figure high probability state or the special figure low probability general figure high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times, it shifts to the normal state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). The time saving that is started after the jackpot game is called a time saving.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), in order to aim at the special figure 1 start port 230, it is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area. That is, in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, even if the ball is entered into the general figure start port 228, it is almost impossible to win the general figure fluctuation game, and the player should not hit the right hand. The ball should be launched toward the left area (should be hit left). It should be noted that the normal state is a non-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special figure low probability general figure high probability state or a special figure high probability general figure high probability state, it is easy to win the general figure fluctuation game, so in order to aim for the general figure start port 228, out of the game area , It is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the right side area where the normal figure start port 228 is provided. That is, as shown in the breakdown of FIG. 11 (a), the probability of being able to obtain a jackpot with probability variation (special figure a) in special figure 1 is 50%, while in special figure 2 with probability variation is 100%. In addition, the number of times the time-saving game state is maintained after the big hit game is always 120 times in the special figure 2, while it may be 50 times in the special figure 1. - 特許庁Therefore, since it is easier for the player to win a big hit with the special figure 2 than with the special figure 1, the player should be allowed to enter the second special figure start port 232 to aim for the big hit with the special figure 2. . Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right side area (should hit to the right).

Also, in the case of a jackpot game, in order to aim at the variable winning hole 234, the game ball is shot toward the right side area where the variable winning hole 234 is provided in the game area (to hit to the right). Become. FIG. 11(b) shows that there are cases where the time saving game state is maintained 120 times and 50 times after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in FIG. 11 (b), when the special figure is not hit even once while the special figure pattern fluctuation display is performed 950 times in the special figure low probability state (time saving game state, non-time saving game state), That is, when the special figure loss continues 950 times, the time saving game state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 1100 times. The period during which the time-saving gaming state is maintained as a result of the special figure losing continuing for a predetermined number of times is called play time, and this time-saving is called b time-saving. The b time-saving game state can be shifted only once after the power is turned on until the first hit, and after a big win once, it can be shifted only once before the next big win. Therefore, if 950 times the special figure loss continues in the b time saving game state, there is no new transition to the b time saving game state, the b time saving game state so far continues, 1100 times special figure loss If it continues, it shifts to a non-time-saving game state (normal state). In addition, the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for transition to the b time saving game state, includes the number of consecutive losses in the a time saving game state and the c time saving game state described later.

Moreover, the time saving design may be stopped and displayed only in the special figure 2 design variation display as shown in FIGS. 5(a) and (b). The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is called c time-saving. This time-saving design is the reservation of the special figure 2 that remained at the time of the time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state) (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 remaining It may be referred to as "suspension".) may be elected in a short time c in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that is performed as a result of being digested in a non-time-saving gaming state. When c time saving is won, the time saving design is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 3), and the decorative design display device 208 displays "decoration 11" (time saving decorative design) shown in FIG. ) are displayed side by side. Then, while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is maintained. That is, it shifts to the c time saving game state without going through the jackpot game. The odds of suddenly winning the short time are 1/90. In addition, the special figure 2 remaining reservation at the time when the time saving game state started after the jackpot game ended, and the special figure 2 at the time when the b time saving game state started continuously 950 times special figure loss In addition to the remaining hold, it is possible that the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state that was started by suddenly winning the time-saving is completed may suddenly win again in the time-saving.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state and b time saving game state, there is a case where the time saving pattern is elected. Also in this case, the time saving design is stop-displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 3). However, on the decorative pattern display device 208, three "decorations 11" (time-saving decorative patterns) shown in FIG. . And in this embodiment, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state and the b time saving game state are given priority over the c time saving game state, the second special figure display device 214 Even if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed at the time, the time saving pattern is invalidated and the time saving game state is not entered.

Furthermore, if you hit the right in the non-time-saving game state, win the normal figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100, and win the second special figure start port 232 (electric chew), if you win c time-saving There is a transition to the c time saving game state without being invalidated. That is, not only the special figure 2 remaining reservation, but also the new special figure 2 reservation may be shifted to the c time saving gaming state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the non-time-saving gaming state. For example, even if the game ball enters the normal pattern start port 228, it may not be possible to win the normal pattern fluctuation game, or even if the normal pattern fluctuation game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a It may be an open pattern that is extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew).

In addition, the condition for transition to the b time-saving gaming state is satisfied by all losing in the c time-saving gaming state (950 consecutive special figure losing), and the c time-saving gaming state is shifted to the b time-saving gaming state. In some cases.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state and the b time saving game state, the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 However, it may be changed so that it is not displayed. In other words, it may be arranged such that it is not stopped and displayed except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time-saving gaming state.

Next, a specific example of game progress in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a plurality of types of stages. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing step by step an example of transition from the normal stage to the buttocks stage. In this example, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed hitting is recommended.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1) displays a background (white background with no pattern) representing the non-time-saving gaming state.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1) is provided with a fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or during symbol stop) and notifying the number of reservations, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, in the upper right part, there is provided a notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 1 (4th design), and in the lower right part, a notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 2 (4th design) is provided. In addition, the notification area during the design fluctuation of the general pattern and the pending number display area of the general pattern may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched to the reserved number indicated by special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is special figure 2 reserved lamp 220 is consistent with the number of holds indicated by In addition, in the special figure 1 symbol fluctuation notification area, while the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, according to the result, for example, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped with "○", and if it is lost, it will be displayed with "X". Stop is displayed. Also, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In addition, the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 1, and this is the display mode corresponding to the symbol variation display and the stop display of the special figure 2 changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the 4th pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, a preview notice or a notice regarding the pattern fluctuation display during execution you can go The fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. Further, the fourth design/reserved number display area 284 and the mini design may be displayed by display means (for example, a sub-liquid crystal display device, a lamp, etc.) different from the decorative design display device 208 .

In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1), the decorative design is variably displayed. That is, the fluctuation in the downward direction, which is the fluctuation direction, is performed at high speed. Also, in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, a mini pattern is displayed. Variation display of the mini symbols is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbols, and is stopped in response to the stop of the variation display of the special symbols. In other words, the variable display of the mini symbols is performed in correspondence with (synchronization with) the variable display of the special symbols, and the execution state of the variable display of the special symbols is reported (suggested) to the player according to the variable state of the mini symbols. It is designed to be

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the center lower part of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed. The variation icon shown in FIG. 12(1) has a round, non-patterned, green display mode. On the drawing, the green icon is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right (the same applies hereinafter). The variation icon suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit in the symbol variation display that is currently being performed by the display mode. That is, the variable icon has a function as a normal notice depending on the display mode. The green display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 in the non-time-saving gaming state, the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 .

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reserved special figures 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of the special figure 1 reserved lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the starting information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest starting information (oldest winning) may be called the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest starting information may be called the second pending icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserved icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the reserved icon on the left side) becomes the older reserved icon.

In FIG. 12 (1), three reserved icons h11, h12, h13 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the first reserved icon h11 is a round plain and It is a white display mode. On the drawings, white icons are indicated by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, the second pending icon h12 is displayed in a round, non-patterned, and red color. On the drawings, slanted cross-hatching indicates that the icon is red (same hereafter). Furthermore, the third pending icon h12 has a round, non-patterned, and green display form, which is the same as the display form of the variable icon. The pending icon suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pre-reading notice depending on the display mode. In other words, it suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display in which the suspension represented by the suspension icon is digested. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. In addition, you may make it suggest that a big-hit expectation degree is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. In the following description, when the default display mode is used, the description to that effect may be omitted. Also, the red display mode suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is 50%. In addition, the green display mode suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is 25%, as described in the display mode of the variable icon.

In FIG. 12(2), the pseudo-continuous effect is started in the variable display of decorative symbols. Pseudo-continuous effect is a variable display mode of decorative symbols in which the variable display of decorative symbols and temporary stop display are executed multiple times in one variable display of special symbols, and the result of one winning judgment (lottery) is displayed. This is a variable display of decorative patterns that makes it appear as if the results of the judgment of suitability have been displayed a plurality of times in spite of the presence of such patterns. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(2), a pseudo-continuous symbol (decorative symbol written as "NEXT") suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left symbol is displayed. "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped in the area 208a, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the right design display area 208c. In the high-speed fluctuation display of the decorative pattern, it is not possible to confirm what kind of pattern the decorative pattern is, but in the temporary stop display, it is possible to confirm what kind of pattern the decorative pattern is. In the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is shaking and fluctuating at an extremely low speed. On the other hand, the mini symbol in the upper left corner continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner, the blinking display of "-", which indicates that the special figure 1 symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, continues. .

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(3), the display screen is blacked out, and the decorative design cannot be seen. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. Also in this FIG. 12 (3), the mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the flashing display of "-", which indicates that the special figure 1 symbol variable display is in progress, continues. .

Eventually, the blackout will end, and the decorative patterns will begin to change again. FIG. 12(4) shows the state immediately before the blackout ends and the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect is started. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(4), characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the blackout has ended and the second fluctuation has started. Further, when the blackout is finished, "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b where the pseudo consecutive symbols were temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 12(2). That is, the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the combination of the decorative symbols when the re-fluctuation is started. Here, the types of decorative designs themselves in the medium design display area 208b are different. Such a difference makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the temporary stop display and the start of the re-varying display. In addition, if the combination of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is the same as the combination of decorative symbols when the re-fluctuation is started, the player will be able to repeat the pseudo consecutive symbols when the blackout ends. may misunderstand that is displayed as a temporary stop. However, as shown in FIGS. 12(2) to 12(4), by making the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of starting the re-fluctuation different, such a game can be achieved. misunderstandings can be prevented. In FIG. 12(5) following FIG. 12(4), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative design is started.

In FIG. 12(6), the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left design display area 208a, and it can be confirmed that the decorative design is "decoration 5", and in FIG. 12(7), the right design display area. A decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at 208c, and it can be confirmed that the decorative pattern is "decoration 1". In the following FIG. 12(8), the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle design display area 208b, and it can be confirmed that the decorative design is "decoration 4". In this FIG. 12(8), the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped (shaking fluctuation display). Before long, as shown in FIG. 12(9), a confirmation display is performed, and the combination of the decorative symbols that fail, such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", is completely stopped and displayed. That is, the decorative pattern does not move during the fixed display. It should be noted that it is naturally possible to confirm what kind of pattern the decorative pattern is in this confirmation display as well.

Further, the variable icon h0 that was displayed during the temporary stop display disappears when the confirmation display is started.

A wipe effect for changing the stage is executed while the decorative pattern is being confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 12 (10), the wipe effect has started. In the wipe effect, the wipe display wp spreads from the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display wp covers the display screen, and the wipe display wp disappears from the display screen. executed. The decorative pattern and the pending icon are not visible because the wipe display wp overlaps, but the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during the wipe effect. The wipe-in started at (10) in FIG. 12 is completed at (11) in FIG. 12, and on the decorative design display device 208 shown in (11) in FIG. In the following FIG. 12 (12), the wipeout is performed, and part of the decoration pattern and the pending icon are becoming visible. When the wipe-in is completed or the wipe-out is started, a stage change is performed. In this example, the stage is changed from the normal stage to the tono stage. The decorative pattern that has become visible after the wipeout is started is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the changed stage. This display mode will be described later. When the wipeout is completed, the wipe effect ends. In addition, when the wipe effect is completed, the symbol variation display of the next special figure is started. FIG. 12(13) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the symbol variation display of the next special figure is started. In this FIG. 12 (13), the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbols. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. In the variable display of decorative symbols, the variable display start operation is performed at the start of the variable display. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 12 (13) is subjected to this movement at the start of the variable display, and is slightly moved in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of variation. In the operation at the start of fluctuation, the decorative pattern is displayed in a recognizable state. In the variable display of the decorative symbols, the downward variable display of the decorative symbols is performed following the operation at the start of variation.

In addition, since the stage is changed from the normal stage to the lord's stage, the lord's character YM1 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(13). . This feudal lord's character YM1 is animated. In addition, at the lower left corner of the statically displayed decorative pattern, a display YM2 of a different character for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed. The combination of decorative patterns at the time when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started is "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" in which display YM2 of characters different for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed. The operation at the time of start of fluctuation is performed with the combination. As a result, the combination of the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the preceding decorative pattern variable display (“decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” shown in FIG. "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" shown in 12 (9)) and the combination of the decorative designs when starting the variable display of the next decorative design (at the start time or immediately after the start from the start time) (Fig. 12 (13 ), in which the display YM2 of different characters for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed ("decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1")). Here, although the decorative patterns are the same, the presence or absence of the display YM2 of a different character is different for each type of decorative pattern, and the types of decorative patterns are the same, but the display modes are different. Such different decorative symbols make it easier for the player to distinguish between the previous stop display and the current start of the variable display. Also, it becomes easier to confirm that a stage change has occurred.

In addition, in FIG. 12 (13), the mini symbols and the fourth symbols have already changed at high speed, but at the time of starting the variation, the confirmed displayed mini symbols and the fourth symbols are displayed (display in FIG. 12 (9)). It is assumed that the variation starts from the same display pattern as . That is, display of mini symbols and fourth symbols (display in FIG. 12 (9)) in accordance with confirmation display of special symbols, and variable display of mini symbols and fourth symbols in response to start of variable display of special symbols. It can be said that the display at the start of the blinking display of (the display immediately before (13) in FIG. 12) is the same.

Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(13), the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, and the icon that was the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. A variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 12(14) is an icon in a default display mode. Also, the icon that was the second suspended icon h12 has become the first suspended icon h11, and the icon that was the third suspended icon h12 has become the second suspended icon h12.

It should be noted that the part that has started to be visible due to the wipeout is difficult to see due to effect display such as light emission (see FIG. 14 (7)), and when the wipeout is completed, the effect display ends and the display content is visible. can be made to be Alternatively, the stage change may occur when the wipeout is completed.

In FIG. 12 (14), the decorative design fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative design.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(15), a combination of the decorative patterns that are lost such as "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also in this case, at the lower left corner of each decorative pattern, a different character YM2 is additionally displayed for each type of decorative pattern.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13(16) continuing from FIG. 12(15), the combination of the decorative patterns that are not accepted such as "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is definitely displayed. Also in this case, at the lower left corner of each decorative pattern, a different character YM2 is additionally displayed for each type of decorative pattern. Also, the lord's character YM1 displayed in animation is depressed.

In FIG. 13 (17), the first special symbol display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 13 (17) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. Also, the shift movement of the pending icon has been completed, and the icon that was the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 13(17) is an icon with a red display mode.

In addition, the period from the start of the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" to the end of the final display (Fig. 12 (8) to Fig. 12 (12)) 2-Decoration 4” is longer than the period (FIGS. 12(15) to 13(16)) from the start of the temporary stop display to the end of the final display.

In FIG. 13 (18), the decorative design fluctuation display is a high-speed fluctuation display in the downward direction, making it difficult to confirm the decorative design.

In FIG. 13(19), the ready-to-win state is established, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. A princess character display YM2 is additionally displayed at the lower left corner of the "Decoration 2" temporarily stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 13 (20), it develops into a super (SP) reach, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Also, the animation display of the lord's character YM1, the variable icon display area 280, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear, and the decorative pattern, which had been displayed large in the center of the display screen until then, is reduced to the lower right corner of the display screen. is displayed. Note that the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (21), an animation is displayed in which the lord who defeated the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, normal jackpots such as "Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2" ("Decoration 2") are displayed. A combination of decoration symbols of "special figure b" (3R normal jackpot) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the decoration 13, the display YM2 of a different character for each type of decorative pattern is not additionally displayed, but may be additionally displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (22), a combination of normal jackpot decorative patterns such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed, after which three rounds of jackpot games are started. ((23) in FIG. 13). When the big hit game ends, it shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving game state).

In FIG. 13 (24), the jackpot game is finished, and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving game state) is shifted. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (24) displays a background of a castle town representing the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in FIG. 13 (24), there is a continuous winning of three balls in the second special figure start port 232, the symbol variation display in the second special figure display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbols. Variable display has started. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 13 (17) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. The combination of the decorative patterns at the time when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started is "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", and the variation start operation is performed with this combination of decorative patterns. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed ("decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13(21)) and the combination of decorative patterns displayed as fixed ("decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13(22) Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2") and a combination of decorative patterns when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern (at the start time or immediately after the start time) ("Decoration 2- decoration 2--decoration 2'). Here, the types of decorative designs themselves in the medium design display area 208b are different. In particular, since the decoration 13 is not displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns when the variable display of the next decoration pattern is started, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that he has won a big hit again.

In addition, on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 where the variable icon h0 is displayed, the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed, and two reserved icons h21 and h22 are displayed.

In addition, at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters "49 remaining" are displayed as a time saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time saving game state continues 49 more times. Further, on the left side of the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, a right-handed first display RH1 is displayed to prompt right-handed. This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed during the time-saving game state even after the symbol variation display of the special figure is finished, and continues to be displayed even after shifting to the demo screen.

FIG. 13 (24) shows a scene in which variation has already started, but after the end of the jackpot game and before the next variation starts, the decoration pattern (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”), mini It is assumed that the symbol (“2-2-2”) and the fourth symbol are displayed momentarily in a recognizable state. That is, display of mini symbols and fourth symbols (display in FIG. 13 (22)) in accordance with confirmation display of special symbols, and variable display of mini symbols and fourth symbols in response to start of variable display of special symbols. It can be said that the display at the start of the blinking display of (the display immediately before (24) in FIG. 13) is the same.

In FIG. 13 (25), the decorative design fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative design.

Note that the movement at the time of starting the variable display may be a movement of slightly moving in the direction opposite to the direction of fluctuation, a movement of shaking the decorative pattern, a movement of enlarging or reducing the decorative pattern, or the like. In any case, it is an operation that can confirm the decorative design.

Next, an example of zone production will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example step by step from entering the sea zone to the sky zone to hitting the jackpot.

In this example, it is a time-saving gaming state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) and is in a state where hitting to the right is recommended. In the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a castle town background representing the time-saving game state, and in this example, a background corresponding to the zone is displayed. In addition, on the left side of the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, a right-handed first display RH1 is displayed to prompt right-handed. Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving game state remaining number display is also displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(1) displays a sea background corresponding to the sea zone. In addition, in this FIG. 14 (1), the second special symbol display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14(1) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. The second pending icon h22 is an icon with a red display mode.

In FIG. 14(2), the decorative pattern variation display is downward high-speed variation.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(3), temporary stop display is performed in a state in which three zone entry patterns of the decoration 12 are aligned. In addition, there is one ball in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is increased to 3, and a three-eyed reservation icon h23 is additionally displayed.

In the following FIG. 14 (4), the confirmation display of the special figure 2 in the second special figure display device 214 is started, and in the decorative design display device 208, the combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" is confirmed. Display starts. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stop-displayed with "x" indicating a loss, and "256" is stop-displayed in the mini-symbol.

When the final display of the decorative pattern is started, the fusuma image fs appears from the left and right sides of the display screen (Fig. 14 (5)), and the entire display screen becomes the fusuma image fs by the animation of closing the fusuma (Fig. 14 ( 6)). The background image, the combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12” and the reserved icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the fusuma image fs and become invisible, but the mini pattern and the fourth pattern / reserved number display area 284 The display at is visible.

As shown in FIG. 14(6), when the entire display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes the fusuma image fs, the zone shift is performed and shifts to the empty zone. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(7), the fusuma begins to open, the back of the fusuma begins to be seen, and the sky background corresponding to the sky zone is displayed. The sky zone is a pre-forecast with a higher expectation of a big hit than the sea zone. Note that the decorative pattern and the background image may not be visually recognized by effect display or the like until the fusuma is fully opened. In addition, the timing of the zone transition may be the timing when the sliding door is fully opened, or may be the timing according to the start of the symbol variation display in the second special figure display device 214.

In addition, the fusuma begins to open, and at the back of the fusuma, a combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed instead of the combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12". I'm starting to see it.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(8), the fusuma is completely opened and the fusuma image fs disappears. In this FIG. 14(8), the second special symbol display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14(8) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. The combination of the decorative symbols at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started is also "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the variation start operation is performed with this combination of decorative symbols. As a result, the combination of the decorative patterns displayed temporarily ("decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" shown in FIG. 14(3)) and the combination of the decorative patterns at the time when the final display is started ((4 ), and the combination of decorative patterns when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern (at the start time or immediately after the start time) (shown in FIG. 14 (8) "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6"). Here, the types of all decorative patterns themselves are different. In this way, by not displaying the decoration 12 in the combination of the decoration patterns when starting the variable display of the next decoration pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the pattern entering the zone has stopped again. Further, since the combination of the decorative patterns when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern is the combination of the decorative patterns of loose stitches representing the failure, the player can be prevented from misunderstanding that he has won a big hit. It should be noted that the combination of the decorative symbols when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbols matches the combination of the mini symbols stopped and displayed in FIG. 14(4). However, it does not have to be the same, and the display of the decorative pattern when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern may be a display (for example, a display of loose stitches) that makes it clear at a glance that the display is lost.

In FIG. 14(8), the mini symbols and the 4th symbols have already changed at high speed, but at the time of starting the variation, the confirmed displayed mini symbols and the 4th symbols are displayed (display in FIG. 14(4)). It is assumed that the variation starts from the same display pattern as . That is, display of mini symbols and fourth symbols (display in FIG. 14 (4)) in response to confirmation display of special symbols, and variable display of mini symbols and fourth symbols in response to start of variable display of special symbols. It can be said that the display at the start of the blinking display of (the display immediately before (8) in FIG. 14) is the same.

In addition, at the stage when the fusuma begins to open and the back of the fusuma begins to be seen (the stage of FIG. 14 (7)), the combination of the decorative patterns is still displayed as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12". "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" may be set at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started.

Further, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(8), the variation of the mini design and the flashing display of the fourth design are also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, and the icon that was the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The change icon h0 is displayed in green. Furthermore, the icon that was the second pending icon h22 until now has become the first pending icon h21. The first pending icon h21 is displayed in red.

In FIG. 14 (9), the decorative design fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative design. In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(9), the display sf1 of the advance notice of dialogue is displayed. The speech notice is a normal notice that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display that is currently being performed. If the line notice here includes the line "sun", the expectation of a big hit will be high.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(10), the combination of the decorative patterns that are lost such as "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, there are two balls in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is increased to 4, and the third reservation icon h23 and the fourth reservation icon h24 are additionally displayed. In the following FIG. 14 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols that are not accepted such as "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is displayed as fixed.

In FIG. 14 (12), the second special symbol display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14 (12) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. Also, the shift movement of the pending icon has been completed, and the icon that was the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 14(13) is an icon with a red display mode. Also, the zone rendering of the empty zone is continued, and the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the background of the sky.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the temporary stop display of "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" to the end of the final display ((3) to (7) in FIG. 14) is longer than "decoration 7-decoration 2-Decoration 9” is longer than the period from the start of the temporary stop display to the end of the final display ((10) to (11) in FIG. 14).

In FIG. 14 (13), the decorative pattern variation display is downward high-speed variation. In addition, here too, the usual notice of dialogue is given. The display sf2 of the advance notice of words in FIG. 14(13) includes the words "sun", and the expectation of a big hit is higher than the display sf1 of the advance notice of the words shown in FIG. 14(9).

In FIG. 14(14), the ready-to-win state is established, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 14 (15), it develops into super reach, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. In addition, the background display, variable icon display area 280, and reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1 disappear, and the decoration pattern, which had been displayed large in the center of the display screen until then, is reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Note that the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15(16) continuing from FIG. 14(15), an animation is displayed in which the lord who defeated the enemy samurai is projected, and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration" is displayed in the center of the display screen. 7", which is a combination of decorative symbols for variable probability big hits, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (17), a combination of decorative patterns of the jackpot such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. there is In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of "777".

In FIG. 15 (18), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a character display saying congratulations on the jackpot. Also, since the variable winning hole 234 is arranged in the right area, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening effect), a right-handed second display RH2 is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. The right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which a letter indicating "throw to the right" is displayed between right-pointing arrows vertically spaced apart, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be.

In FIG. 15 (19), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. In the following FIG. 15 (20), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variable jackpot, the V shutter VS is opened in the second round (final round), and a V prize can be obtained. On the decorative pattern display device 208 where the second round has started, a character display of "Aim for the V" is displayed to prompt the game ball to pass through the V passing switch VS.

In FIG. 15 (21), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is performing V winning notification for notifying that the V winning has been won. In other words, it is notified that the state will shift to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

In FIG. 15 (22), the end effect of the big win game has started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the characters "big win end". Further, the right hitting first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the jackpot game, and is also displayed in this ending effect.

When the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In FIG. 15 (23), the second special symbol display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 15 (23) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. The combination of the decorative patterns at the time when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started is the combination of the decorative patterns of the first big win, ie, "decoration drawing 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (see FIG. 15 (17)). It is a combination of the same decorative symbols as , and the variation start operation is performed with this combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (23), the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state is displayed. In addition, at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters of "remaining 119" are displayed as the display of the remaining number of time-saving gaming states.

FIG. 15 (23) shows a scene in which the variation has already started, but after the jackpot game ends, until the next variation starts, the decorative pattern (here, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) ), a mini symbol (here, “7-7-7”) and a fourth symbol are displayed for a moment in a recognizable state. That is, display of mini symbols and fourth symbols (display in FIG. 15 (17)) in accordance with confirmation display of special symbols, and variable display of mini symbols and fourth symbols in response to start of variable display of special symbols. It can be said that the display at the start of the blinking display of (the display immediately before (23) in FIG. 15) is the same. In FIG. 15 (24), the decorative pattern variation display is downward high-speed variation.

As a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbols after the jackpot game is over, there is a combination representing a loss such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23'). may be displayed. In FIG. 15 (23'), the variation start operation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5". By doing this, a combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the jackpot game (“decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (16)), and the combination of decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed. The combination (“Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (17)) and the combination of the decorative symbols (Fig. 15 (23') is different from "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5"). In the example shown in FIG. 15 (23'), the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are different, so that the player does not have to misunderstand that he has won another big hit.

It should be noted that the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped before the start of the jackpot game (“Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (16)) and the combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed (Fig. 15 (17) "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") and the combination of the decorative pattern at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern (at the start time or immediately after the start from the start time) (Fig. 15 (23 ') shown in 'decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5') is different, the mini symbol and the 4th symbol are displayed before the start of the jackpot game, and the next decoration. The display at the time of starting the variable display of symbols (at the start time or immediately after the start time) is the same.

Next, a modified example of the progress of the game shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 will be described.

FIG. 15(3') shows the same state as FIG. 14(3), and the decorative pattern display device 208 performs a temporary stop display in a state where three zone entering patterns of the decoration 12 are aligned.

In the following FIG. 15 (5'), the state in which the pattern variation display in the second special figure display device 214 continues, that is, in the state in which the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern continues, the fusuma image fs appears from the left and right of the display screen. is doing. Then, the animation of closing the fusuma is displayed while the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern continues.

When the fusuma is completely closed as shown in FIG. 15 (6′), the confirmation display of the special figure 2 in the second special figure display device 214 is started, and the fourth design / reservation number display area 284 special The fourth symbol in FIG. 2 is stop-displayed with "x" representing a failure, and "256" is stop-displayed in the mini-symbol. The display of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the fusuma image fs and is not visible.

Fig. 15(7') shows the same state as Fig. 14(7), and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the fusuma (sliding door) begins to open, and "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6" which is stopped and displayed is beginning to be seen. . Note that "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" may start to appear.

As described above, the temporary stop display of "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" may be terminated in a state in which the display of the decorative pattern is no longer visible (a state in which it is difficult to see). In other words, the confirmation display and the confirmation display of the decorative design in the special figure display device may be started in a state in which the decorative design is no longer visible (invisible state). Then, when the display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, the display may be different from the temporary stop display. It should be noted that not only the temporary stop display of "decoration 12", but also other decoration patterns (for example, "decoration 11" and "decoration 13") can be ended in a state where they are not visible (a state that is difficult to see). good.

In addition, effects that make the decorative pattern invisible include blackout (FIG. 12 (3)), wipe effects (FIGS. 12 (10) to (12)), and animation of fusuma image fs (FIGS. (7) in the same figure and the effect display are given as examples, but the presentation in which the decorative pattern is not visible is not limited to these.

16A and 16B are diagrams showing an example of a case in which power is immediately restored after a power failure occurs while the decorative symbols are being displayed.

FIG. 16(9-1) shows the same state as FIG. 12(9), in which a combination of unsuccessful decorative symbols such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is displayed as determined. A power failure occurs while this confirmation display is being performed, but the power is immediately restored. FIG. 16(9-2) shows that power failure has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power recovery process (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. . Before long, the first special symbol display device 212 starts to display the symbol variation, and as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 16 (13') is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. The combination of decorative patterns at the time of power restoration in FIG. It is also different from the combination of decorative symbols (combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 12 (13)) when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbols when no . A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” corresponds to a combination of initial patterns and is always displayed when power is restored. A combination of the initial symbols is displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started. It should be noted that the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Further, the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, and the icon that was the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. is also the default display mode. In addition, no stage change is performed, and the lord's character YM1 and the character display YM2 that differs for each type of decorative pattern are not displayed.

FIG. 16 (13′) shows a scene in which the variation has already started, but after the display of characters “preparing for return” is completed, the decoration pattern (here, “decoration 1 -Decoration 2-Decoration 3"), mini symbols (here, "1-2-3"), and the fourth symbol are displayed for a moment in a recognizable state. In other words, the display of the mini symbols and the fourth symbol when the power is restored is different from the display of the mini symbols and the fourth symbol which were fixedly displayed when the power was cut (display in FIG. It can be said that it is different from the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (the display immediately before (13) in FIG. 12) at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol when no disconnection occurs.

FIG. 16(4-1) shows the same state as FIG. 14(4), in which a combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" is displayed. In this case as well, the power is cut off while the confirmation display is being performed, but the power is immediately restored. FIG. 16(4-2) shows that a power failure has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power recovery process (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. . Before long, the first special figure display device 212 starts to display the symbol variation, and as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 16(8') is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. The combination of decorative patterns at the time of power restoration in FIG. 16(8') is "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is the combination of the initial patterns described above. As a result, the combination of decorative patterns ("decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3") when power is restored and the variable display of the next decorative pattern is started is the combination of decorative patterns that was fixedly displayed at the time of power failure ( Unlike "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12"), the combination of decorative patterns (" decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6"). It should be noted that the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Also, in FIG. 16(8'), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode and the pending icons h21 and h22 in the default display mode are displayed. In addition, the zone effect itself is not performed, and the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state is displayed.

FIG. 16(8') shows a scene in which the variation has already started, but after the end of the character display of "preparing to return" and before the next variation starts, the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 1 -Decoration 2-Decoration 3"), mini symbols (here, "1-2-3"), and the fourth symbol are displayed for a moment in a recognizable state. In other words, the display of the mini symbols and the fourth symbol when the power is restored is different from the display of the mini symbols and the fourth symbol (the display in FIG. It can be said that it is different from the display of the mini symbols and the fourth symbol (the display immediately before (8) in FIG. 14) at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol when no disconnection occurs.

In this embodiment, the initial pattern combination is "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", but the initial pattern combination is not limited to this combination, and other combinations may be used. However, a combination that reminds of a big win is not preferable, and it is desirable to use a combination that cannot be displayed in the variable display.

According to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display that variably displays decorative patterns,
The display means displays a decorative pattern confirmation display for displaying the decorative patterns in a state in which the decorative patterns can be confirmed [for example, the display at the start of the display of the decorative pattern disguise display, the display at the start of the variable display, and the decorative pattern disguise display. Temporary stop display, stop display (confirmed display) that is displayed after finishing the decorative pattern disguise display, display combining the temporary stop display and the confirmed display],
The decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design variation display and the decorative design confirmation display at the time of starting the next decorative design variation display may be different [for example, FIG. 12 (2) and FIG. , (9) and (13) in FIG. 12, (22) and (24) in FIG. 13, (8) in FIG. 14 (4), and (23′) in FIG. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, when the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display is the decorative pattern of the pattern, when starting the next decorative pattern variation display, the player is asked to decorate the pattern. You don't have to misunderstand that you won a big hit by the design. Further, when the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display is a decorative pattern representing a big hit, the player is misunderstood that he/she has hit again when the next decorative pattern variation display is started. I don't have to.

In addition, the display of the decorative patterns may be a display by combining the decorative patterns. Also, the decorative pattern may be a number, a symbol, or a pattern.

The decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design variation display may be a display suggesting the result of the lottery.

The decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design variation display may be wholly or partly included in the decorative design variation display, or may be included in the decorative design variation display. Instead, it may be included in the stop display of the decorative symbols that is started following the variable display of the decorative symbols.

"The difference between the decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design variation display and the decorative design confirmation display at the time of starting the next decorative design variation display is the type of decorative design [eg, decoration 1 to decoration 13]. may be the same and the display mode [for example, the presence or absence of character display YM2] may be different, but the type of decorative design may be different." or the type of symbol or the type of picture.

The display for confirming the decorative design by temporarily stopping the decorative design is included in the display for confirming the decorative design. However, when the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative pattern temporarily disappears or becomes invisible, it is not included in the decorative pattern confirmation display.

again,
"The decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design variation display and the decorative design confirmation display when starting the next decorative design variation display may be the same [for example, FIG. 13 (16) and the same figure (17 ), (11) and (12) in FIG. 14, (17) and (23) in FIG. 15],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

"When the power is restored during the display of the decorative design confirmation display after the start of the decorative design confirmation display, the display means displays a predetermined display (initial display) as the decorative design confirmation display [for example, FIG. 16 ( 13′) or a combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” shown in FIG. 8(8′)]. That is, the first display of the decorative design, which is the decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design variation display [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12 (9) or "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12"] and the second display of the decorative design, which is a decorative design confirmation display when starting the next decorative design variation display [for example, "Decoration 5- "Decoration 4-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" in FIG. If the power is restored during display, the decorative pattern confirmation display is a third display different from the first display and the second display [for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-decoration 3” or “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” in FIG. 16(8′)]. ”
"When the first decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design variation display and the second decorative design confirmation display when starting the next decorative design variation display are different, the first decoration The display time of the first decorative pattern confirmation display [for example, the period of (8) to (12) in FIG. 12 (15) to 13 (16), the period from (3) to (7) in FIG. 14 is longer than the period from (10) to (11) in FIG. ] may be longer.
Further, the decorative design confirmation display after starting the decorative design fluctuation display may be display of temporary stop of the decorative design (shaking display) or display of final stop of the decorative design (determined display). Alternatively, the display may be from the start of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols to the end of the final stop display. It should be noted that the display time of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols may differ. For example, the display time may be 0 seconds or 1 second or more and 10 seconds or less. On the other hand, the display time of the actual stop of the decorative symbols may be constant. However, the display of the final stop of the decorative pattern may be short in the case of a specific first display (for example, a display that notifies a small hit), or may be short in a specific second display (for example, a display that notifies a big win). In the case of a display in which effects such as stage transitions and zone changes are performed), it may be longer.

again,
``The display means also includes a different symbol variation display [for example, a fourth symbol (fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 during symbol variation notification area), a mini symbol] that variably displays another symbol different from the decorative symbol. is viable, and
The display means executes another pattern confirmation display [for example, the display immediately before (9) to (12) in FIG. 12 and (13) in FIG. 12] that displays another pattern in a state where it can be confirmed. ,
Another design confirmation display after starting another design variation display [for example, the fourth design and mini design in FIG. 12 (9) to (12)] and another design when starting the next another design variation display It is the same as the confirmation display [for example, the fourth pattern or mini pattern immediately before FIG. 12 (13)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

"The first display of the decorative design in the decorative design confirmation display after the start of the decorative design variation display is a display that is not displayed in the another design confirmation display after the start of the other design variation display [for example, decoration 11 ~Decoration 13 or a pseudo-continuous design (decorative design written as "NEXT")] may be used. ”
It should be noted that the display of different symbols (variation display of different symbols, confirmation display of different symbols) may be display using a combination of different symbols or display using one different symbol. Also, the different pattern may be a number or a symbol.

Further, the display of the different symbols (the different symbol variation display, the different symbol confirmation display) may be a display displayed by means other than the display means. For example, it may be a second display means (liquid crystal display device or lamp) dedicated to another pattern, or may be a sub-display means when the display means is used as the main display means.

Next, the event pre-reading notice that is executed after the end of the lose reach effect will be described.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an event prefetch notice step by step. In this example, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed hitting is recommended.

In FIG. 17 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also performs the variation display of the decorative symbols. In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(1), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed in the variation icon display area 280, and the three suspension icons h11 are displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. ~ h13 are displayed. These three pending icons h11 to h13 are also in the default display mode.

In addition, in the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 17(1), there are cases where the reservation icon change notice described later and the zone effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15 are executed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(2), a combination of decorative patterns that are lost such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed. -Decoration 4-Decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols that are lost, is confirmed and displayed.

17(1) and 17(2) are normal fluctuations, and the time length of the decorative design fluctuation display is shorter than the normal fluctuation (for example, 5 seconds). In some cases, the period of temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that are lost is shorter in the shortened variation than in the normal variation. Furthermore, the shortened variation includes a super-shortened variation in which the temporary stop display period is 0 seconds. Also, in the shortened variation, the operation at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols is not performed.

In FIG. 17 (4), the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbols is also started. Also, the shift movement of the pending icon has been completed, and the icon that was the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. Also, the icon that was the second reserved icon h12 until now has become the first reserved icon h11. The display mode of the icon that has newly become the first pending icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the green display mode during shift movement, and the pending icon change notice has started. This pending icon change notice is a kind of fore-reading notice suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win in the symbol variation display that starts when the pending indicated by the pending icon whose display mode has changed is digested. The degree of expectation of a big win differs depending on the display mode, and the degree of expectation of a big win is higher in the green display mode than in the default display mode. The execution start timing of the hold icon change notice is when the hold is increased or when the shift is moved. The pending icon change notice is not started during the period. If there is a hold increase during these periods, the hold icon change notice is made at the time of shift movement.

In FIG. 17(5), there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reservations for the special figure 1 is increased to 3, and a three-eyed reservation icon h13 is additionally displayed. At the time of the increase in the number of pending, the notice of change of the pending icon is also started, and the display mode of the increased third pending icon h13 is a green display mode. In addition, a button notice, which is a kind of normal notice, has also started. In the button announcement, an image related to the production button 136 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. - 特許庁Here, an image is displayed that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation valid period. More specifically, a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136, a meter display 136b representing the remaining period of the operation effective period, and a character display 136c that prompts the user to press the button are displayed. In this example, the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period. When the production button 136 is pressed, the upper production device 2 located at the initial position above the decorative design display device 208 descends in front of the decorative design display device 208.例文帳に追加In the button advance notice, the degree of expectation for the big win differs depending on how far the upper effect device 2 descends, and the more the upper effect device 2 descends, the higher the degree of expectation for the big win. In FIG. 17(6), the upper effect device 2 is slightly lowered while the decorative symbols are changing at high speed in all of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. 17(7), the upper effect device 2 rises to the initial position, and the decorative pattern display device 208 temporarily stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that fail, "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8". ing. Then, in FIG. 17(8), "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is fixedly displayed.

In FIG. 17 (9), the first special symbol display device 212 has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the decorative symbol variation display. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17(9) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, the first pending icon h11 in the green display mode has changed to the variable icon h0 in the same green display mode, and now the normal notice is being given. become.

In FIG. 17 (10), the decorative pattern variation display is downward high-speed variation.

In FIG. 17(11), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started.

In FIG. 17 (12), normal reach does not develop into super reach, and "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 17 (13) following FIG. 17 (12), the event pre-reading notice is performed in a state in which the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" continues. there is During the period (12) to (13) in FIG. 17) in which the combination of decorative symbols that are lost when the reach is established is temporarily stopped and displayed, the combination of decorative symbols that is lost is temporarily stopped when the combination of decorative symbols is not established. It is longer than the display period (FIG. 17(2)). Further, the event pre-reading notice in FIG. 17(13) is an animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and calls for revenge. The event foreseeing notice in this example is to foretell an event that will occur in any one of the one or more pattern variation displays that are currently being postponed to start, and the confirmation display of the big hit pattern, that is, In some cases, a big hit is predicted, and in other cases, a ready-to-win pattern with a higher expectation of a big win than the ready-to-win pattern performed this time will be performed. Here, since the normal reach is stopped, it is predicted that the symbol variation display started when one of the two holds is digested will develop into super reach or special super reach. It should be noted that the event pre-reading notice may notify the degree of expectation of the big win in addition to the notice of the event. For example, the degree of expectation for a big win may be reported depending on the type of animation display js. Also, instead of an advance notice of the event, only the degree of expectation for the big win may be reported. Further, even if the event pre-forecast notice is executed, there may be a case where it does not develop into super reach or special super reach (so-called fake notice).

Further, the pending icon change notice by the second pending icon h12 is continued.

In FIG. 17 (14), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is performed.

In FIG. 17 (15), the first special symbol display device 212 has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17 (15) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, and the first pending icon h11, which was in the default display mode, has changed to the variable icon h0 in the default display mode as well.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (16) continued from FIG. 17 (15), the decorative design fluctuation display is downward high-speed fluctuation.

In FIG. 18 (17), there are two balls in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reservations for special figure 1 is increased to 3, and the second reservation icon h12 and the third reservation icon h13 are added. is displayed. In addition, the ready-to-win effect is started, and "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 18 (18), it develops into a super (SP) reach as predicted in advance of the event, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (19), an animation showing how the lord is defeated by the enemy samurai is displayed without developing into a special super reach. -Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped. In FIG. 18 (20) following FIG. 18 (19), the event pre-reading notice is performed while the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" continues. ing. The period of temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that are lost when the reach reaches super reach (FIG. 18 (19) to (20) in FIG. 18) is a temporary display of the combination of decorative symbols that is lost when the reach is not established. Longer than the period of stop display (FIG. 17 (2)), and the period of temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that are lost when reach is established but does not develop into super reach (FIG. 17 (12) to the same It is longer than the figure (13)). The event prefetch notice in FIG. 18(20) is also the same animation display js as the event prefetch notice in FIG. 17(13). 18 (20) is a symbol variation display that starts when any one of the three reservations is digested, and the special super with a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. It is predicted to develop into a reach.

In FIG. 18 (21), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is performed.

Note that even in the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 17(15) to 18(20), there are cases where the pending icon change notice and the zone effect explained with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15 are executed.

In FIG. 18 (22), the first special symbol display device 212 has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the decorative symbol variation display. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 18 (22) is subjected to the operation at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, and the first pending icon h11, which was displayed in green, has changed to the variable icon h0, which is also displayed in green. Also, the icon that was the second reserved icon h12 until now has become the first reserved icon h11. The display mode of the icon that has newly become the first pending icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode during the shift movement, and the pending icon change notice, which is a pre-reading notice, has started. there is The prospective advance notice by the pending icon in the red display mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the advance notice by the pending icon in the green display mode.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (23), the decorative design fluctuation display is downward high-speed fluctuation.

In FIG. 18 (24), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (24) in which the ready-to-win state has been established, the display sf3 of the dialogue notice, which is a type of normal notice, is also displayed. Next, in FIG. 18 (25), it develops into super reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai on the entire display screen. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (26), a red flashing display fl1 indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit is displayed, and as the event prediction in FIG. is doing. However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(27), there is a combination of false decorative patterns such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" which is temporarily stopped and displayed among the red flash display fl1. After that, in the following figure (28), the temporary stop display of the combination of the missing decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" continues. After that, in FIG. 18 (29), a wipe effect is started as a resurrection effect, and in FIG. 18 (30) in which the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative pattern disappears due to the wipe display wp.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (31) continuing from FIG. 18 (30), the wipeout has started and a part of the decorative design is becoming visible. In the following FIG. 19 (32), the wipe effect is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" is still temporarily stopped, and the revival effect ends in failure. In addition, in FIG. 19 (32), the event prefetch notice is executed by displaying the animation display js. Here, it is assumed that the hold to be executed next is targeted, and in the variable display in which the advance notice of the event is executed, the fact that the special super reach has been executed is predicted to result in a big hit.

It should be noted that it may be started in FIG. 18 (28) before the wipe effect is started.

In FIG. 19 (33), a confirmation display of a combination of unsuccessful decorative patterns such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" is performed.

The period of temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols for failure in the case of special super ready-to-win (Fig. 18 (28) to (32) in Fig. 19) is the period for the combination of decorative symbols to be lost when the winning is not established. Longer than the period of temporary stop display (Fig. 17 (2)), and the period of temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that are lost when reach is established but does not develop into super reach (Fig. 17 (12) ~ It is longer than (13) in FIG. Furthermore, the period of the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the failure when it develops to the special super reach (Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 19 (32)) is the special super reach even if it develops to the super reach. may be longer than the period of temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that are not successful (FIG. 18(19) to FIG. 18(20)).

In FIG. 19 (34), the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbols is also started. Also, the shift movement of the pending icon has been completed, the first pending icon h11 in the red display mode has changed to the variable icon h0 in the red display mode as well, and the normal notice has started.

In FIG. 19 (35), a button notice, which is a type of normal notice, has also started, and the decorative design display device 208 displays a button image 136a, a meter display 136b, and a character display 136c saying "press". there is The production button 136 is pressed within the effective period of operation, and the upper production device 2 descends in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the initial position. In FIG. 19 (36), the upper effect device 2 moves to the state shown in FIG. It has dropped more than when , and the expectation of a big hit is high. Before long, in FIG. 19 (37), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 19 (38), this progresses to super reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai over the entire display screen. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39), a rainbow-colored flashing display fl2 representing the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed, developing into a special super (SPSP) reach. The rainbow color has a higher expectation of a big win than the red color, and is a color that indicates the determination of the big win. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (40), a combination of false decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" displayed temporarily appears from the rainbow-colored flash display fl2. However, in the following (41) in the same figure, a wipe effect is started as a resurrection effect. In FIG. 19 (42) where the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative pattern is completely hidden once by the wipe display wp. When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out starts, and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and in FIG. b' 3R normal jackpot) decorative pattern combination is temporarily stopped, and the resurrection effect is successful. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (44), the combination of the decorative patterns for the normal jackpot is displayed.

Note that the resurrection effect may be an effect that always occurs when the special super reach ends, or may be an effect that may or may not occur. In addition, the part that started to be visible due to the wipeout becomes difficult to see due to the effect display ef (see FIG. 14 (7)) such as light emission, and when the wipeout is completed, the effect display ends and the display content becomes visible. can be made to be Alternatively, during the wipe production, high-speed fluctuation due to re-fluctuation is performed, and it is difficult to confirm the decorative pattern from the part that has begun to be seen due to the wipe-out, and when the wipe production ends, the re-fluctuation also ends, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Display may be performed. Further, the wipe effect may not be performed, and high-speed re-fluctuation may be performed as the resurrection effect.

In the example of game progress shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 above, the animation display js of the event prediction notice with the same effect mode is executed for each loss reach with a different reach pattern (reach type), and the next fluctuation is the target of the prediction notice. Although it has been changed, the animation display js of the advance notice of the event is not only performed each time by the continuous variable display of the decoration pattern, but also may be performed one time. In this case, it is possible that the 2nd change will be the target change for the pre-reading notice, the 3rd change will be the target change for the pre-reading notice, and the 4th change will be the target change for the pre-reading notice. be. In addition, when there are two or more holds, the player does not know which fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the pre-reading notice.

Further, FIG. 19A summarizes the relationship between the execution reach pattern of the event pre-forecast and the event (implied content) targeted for the event pre-forecast.

When the event pre-reading notice is executed due to the normal reach losing, the event pre-reading notice becomes an effect for notifying that the super (SP) reach or the special super (SPSP) reach will be performed.

When the event pre-reading notice is executed due to the super (SP) reach loss, the event pre-reading notice becomes an effect for notifying that the special super (SPSP) reach will be performed.

When the event advance notice is executed while developing to the special super (SPSP) reach, the event advance notice is an effect of foretelling the determination of the big win.

In addition, in the case of a normal reach loss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed.

In addition, if the pattern of reach production in the special low probability state (non-probable variable gaming state) is lost, the event prediction notice is not executed, and if the pattern of reach production in the special high probability state is lost, It may be possible to execute the event advance notice, or on the contrary, if the pattern of reach production in the special high probability state is lost, the event advance notice is not executed, and the special low probability state (non-variable In the game state), if the pattern of the ready-to-win effect is lost, event pre-reading notice may be executed.

Also, in the case of a loss in the reach production pattern in the normal low probability state (non-time-saving game state), the event pre-reading notice is not executed, and in the case of a loss in the reach production in the normal high probability state, the event pre-read The notice may be executed, on the contrary, in the case of loss in the reach production in the normal pattern high probability state, the event prediction notice is not executed, and in the normal pattern low probability state (non-time-saving game state) If the ready-to-win effect pattern fails, event prediction may be performed.

Also, in the case of a loss in the reach production pattern in the advantageous state (special high probability state general high probability state, special high low probability state general low probability state, special low probability state general high probability state), If the event prediction notice is not executed and the pattern of the reach effect in the normal state (special low probability state general pattern low probability state) is lost, the event prediction notice may be executed, or on the contrary , In the case of loss in the pattern of reach production in the normal state (special low probability state general low probability state), the event prediction notice is not executed, advantageous state (special high probability state general high probability state, special In the case of a loss in the pattern of the reach effect in the low probability state normal low probability state, low probability state normal high probability state), the event pre-reading notice may be executed.

Also, the event look-ahead effect may be a suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big hit (see FIG. 20) instead of a suggestion of reach. Furthermore, instead of the event prefetch effect, an effect suggesting the setting value to be changed in the setting change process of step S117 of FIG. 6 may be executed.

Furthermore, even if a reach loss occurs, the event prediction notice is not always executed, and there are cases where it is not executed. For example, even if normal reach loss occurs and develops into super reach in the next fluctuation, there is a case where the event prediction notice is not executed. Alternatively, variable display of decorative symbols in a predetermined state (for example, variable display of decorative symbols in b time-saving game state (during play time), time-saving game state or probability variable game state The last decorative design variation display, etc.), even if a reach failure occurs, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed.

Further, when the normal reach is lost and the event pre-forecast is executed, the event pre-forecast may be repeatedly executed until the change becomes the target of the event pre-forecast. That is, the same event pre-reading notice may be executed for each change (every temporary stop display period).

Further, the event pre-reading notice is a specific display of animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and says revenge, but it may be a specific sound or a specific light emission.

Next, a modified example of the progress of the game shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing step by step a modification of the event prefetch notice.

Fig. 20(19') shows the same state as Fig. 18(19), and the decoration pattern display device 208 displays an animation showing the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach. At the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative symbols that are not accepted such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is displayed temporarily. In the following FIG. 20 (20'), the event mixture notice is started instead of the event prefetch notice. In this mixed event notice, a single picture ec of the character is displayed on the entire display screen to attract the player's line of sight. It becomes rich that there is a big hit. That is, the notice that the resurrection effect will be performed corresponds to the normal notice of the event, and the notice that there is a big win in the pending state corresponds to the advance notice of the event. In the single picture ec displayed in FIG. 20(20′), the line “I still have a long way to go” is spoken, and in FIG. In 20 (22'), the single picture ec becomes invisible due to the wipe display wp. Next, a wipeout is performed, and in FIG. 20 (23'), the wipe effect has ended. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (23'), a combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 13-decoration 4" for a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot for "special b") is displayed temporarily. It has been done, and the revival production has been successful. Then, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (24'), the combination of the decorative designs for the normal jackpot is displayed.

Fig. 20 (19'') is also in the same state as Fig. 18 (19), and the decoration pattern display device 208 shows an animation showing how the lord is defeated by the enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach. is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative symbols that are not accepted such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is displayed temporarily. In the following FIG. 20 (20''), the event prefetch notice is started. This event pre-reading notice is not a pre-reading notice of any suspension, but a pre-reading notice in which the change to be notified is fixed. In other words, if the character is in a pose with the thumb raised, it becomes a forewarning notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the next variation, and if the character utters a line, it is a foreknowledgement that the big win is certain in the next variation. become. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (20''), a display cp of a pose in which the character raises its thumb is displayed.

In FIG. 20 (21''), a confirmation display of the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is performed.

In FIG. 20 (22''), the next fluctuation that was the notice target of the event prefetch notice is started, first, the symbol fluctuation display in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and in the following same figure (23'') , the variable display of decorative patterns has started. In this next change, a reach state is established in FIG. 4", which is a combination of decorative symbols for a normal jackpot, is displayed as a fixed display.

According to the above description,
"Look-ahead effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] for executing multiple types of look-ahead effects,
advance notice effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] for executing the notice effect [for example, button notice, dialogue notice] in the pattern variation display that is currently being performed;
A game machine comprising
One kind of the look-ahead effect among the plurality of types of look-ahead effects is a first look-ahead effect [for example, pending icon change notice, zone effect],
One type of prefetching effect among the plurality of types of prefetching effects is a second prefetching effect [for example, an event prefetching notice],
The look-ahead effect means may execute the first look-ahead effect in parallel with the forewarning effect [for example, in FIG. Display sf1, display sf2 of pre-reading notice and dialogue notice by empty zone in FIG. 14 (13)],
The look-ahead effect means does not execute the second look-ahead effect in parallel with the notice effect [for example, FIG. 17 (13), FIG. In FIG. (32), the advance notice effect is not executed and only the event prefetch notice is executed],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the second pre-reading notice can be made conspicuous.

The advance notice effect is a so-called normal notice effect, but instead of this notice effect, a prefetch effect other than the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect may be performed.

Further, although the advance notice effect, the first look-ahead effect, and the second look-ahead effect are displays, they are not limited to displays, and may be sound, light emission, movable body movement, or the like.

again,
"The look-ahead effect means performs the first look-ahead effect [e.g., suspension There is no case where the execution of icon change notice] is started [for example, it is not started when there is a hold increase in the first period, but is started when the shift is moved],
The prefetch effect means may start executing the second prefetch effect in the first period [for example, FIG. 17 (13), FIG. 18 (20), FIG. ],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first period may have a different period length.

again,
"Equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a decorative design variable display that variably displays the display of the decorative design,
The decorative symbol variation display may include a suggesting period that suggests the result of the judgment result [for example, the period during which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (Fig. 18 (28) and Fig. 19 (32)].
The first period is a period including the suggested period [for example, a period from FIG. 18 (28) to FIG. ) to FIG. 19 (31))]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Here, the display means can execute the stationary display of the decorative symbols subsequent to the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the first period is the period during which the stationary display of the decorative symbols is performed 19 (33) period of fixed display of the decorative pattern) may be a period that does not include. It can be said that the stop display of the decorative symbols also suggests the result of the win-or-fail judgment, but it can also be said that the stop display of the decorative symbols notifies the result of the win-or-fail judgment.

Further, the first period may be a period including a period during which a temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbols is displayed. More specifically, in the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative pattern starts to be displayed, the temporary stop display is once invisible, and then the temporary stop display is visible again. It may be a period until the display of the final stop (confirmation display) is displayed. Alternatively, in the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative pattern starts to be displayed, the temporary stop display temporarily disappears, and the temporary stop display does not become visible again. It may be a period until display of stop (confirmation display) is displayed. That is, the first period may be a period from when the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbols is started to when the final stop display (final display) is displayed.

again,
"Decorative pattern fluctuation display has multiple types of fluctuation display patterns [for example, fluctuation patterns including reach patterns],
The second look-ahead effect is a effect that suggests what will happen in the decorative symbol variation display that will start after this [for example, what kind of ready-to-win pattern will be executed, or whether there will be a big hit]. ,
The second look-ahead effect is a effect with different content suggested by the pattern [for example, FIG. 19(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

"One type of pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is the first pattern [for example, a variation pattern in which reach is not established], and one type of pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is the second pattern [for example, normal reach fluctuation pattern], and the second pattern has a longer suggested period than the first pattern [for example, FIG. 17 (2) than FIG. (13) in FIG. 17 is longer], the look-ahead effect means does not execute the second look-ahead effect in the first pattern [for example, FIG. The rendering means may execute the second look-ahead rendering in the second pattern [for example, FIG. 18 (20)]. , the first look-ahead effect [for example, pending icon change notice] may be executed [for example, the pending icon change notice may be executed in FIG. ~ In (13) of the same figure, a pending icon change notice is being executed by the second pending icon h12].” Furthermore, the second pattern is a ready-to-win effect (two same decorative patterns are confirmed). The first pattern is a non-reach production (two different decorative patterns can be confirmed). It may be a variable display pattern in which the state in which the third decorative pattern cannot be confirmed in the state is continued.

"One type of pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is a first reach effect pattern, and one type of variable display pattern among the plurality of types of variable display patterns is a second pattern. It is a ready-to-win effect pattern, the look-ahead effect means does not execute the second look-ahead effect in the first ready-to-win effect pattern, and the look-ahead effect means performs the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern of , the second look-ahead effect may be executed." Further, the pattern of the second ready-to-win effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern of the first ready-to-win effect. It is a pattern of high reach production. For example, the pattern of the second ready-to-win effect may be a pattern of super ready-to-win or special super ready-to-win, and the pattern of the first ready-to-win effect may be a pattern of normal reach. In addition, the pattern of the second reach production is a pattern of reach production in the special figure high probability state (probability variable gaming state), and the pattern of the first reach production is the special figure low probability state (non-probability variation gaming state) It may be a pattern of reach production in . Or on the contrary, the pattern of the second reach production is a pattern of reach production in a special low probability state, and the pattern of the first reach production is a pattern of reach production in a special high probability state. good. In addition, the pattern of the second reach production is a pattern of reach production in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving game state), and the pattern of the first reach production is the normal pattern low probability state (non time saving game state) It may be a pattern of reach production in . Or here also on the contrary, the pattern of the second reach production is a pattern of reach production in the normal low probability state, the pattern of the first reach production is the pattern of reach production in the normal high probability state may In addition, the pattern of the second reach production is the reach in the advantageous state (special high probability state general high probability state, special high low probability state general low probability state, special low probability state general high probability state) It is a pattern of production, and the first pattern of reach production may be a pattern of reach production in the normal state (special low probability state normal low probability state). Alternatively, here, on the contrary, the second ready-to-win effect pattern may be the ready-to-win effect pattern in the normal state, and the first ready-to-win effect pattern may be the ready-to-win effect pattern in the advantageous state.

According to the type of the pattern, the foreseeing production means may suggest different contents [for example, events targeted for foreknowledge of circumstances], but the same production mode [for example, a character riding a motorcycle appears and chants revenge. Animation display js] The second look-ahead effect may be executable.” That is, the second look-ahead effect suggests different contents depending on the type of the pattern, but the effect mode is the same. may

"The look-ahead effect means, when the ready-to-win effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the success/failure determination is lost in the suggestion period, the second look-ahead effect is a ready-to-win effect that is higher than the ready-to-win effect ( For example, a read-ahead performance suggesting that a ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation of a big win than the ready-to-win performance or a ready-to-win performance with a longer performance time than the ready-to-win performance is executed, and the highest reach is performed. When the performance is performed and the result of the winning/failure determination is suggested to be a loss in the suggestion period, the second look-ahead performance suggests that the decorative pattern variation display for a big win is executed in the hold. It may be something that executes a performance.”
"The look-ahead effect means may execute the second look-ahead effect when the ready-to-win effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the success/failure determination is a loss in the suggestion period. In the symbol variation display of the state (for example, the symbol variation display in the play time, the last symbol variation display in which the time saving game state or the probability variation game state is maintained, etc.), reach production is performed and the judgment is made during the suggestion period. Even if it is suggested that the result is a loss, the second look-ahead effect may not be executed."
Next, the character object vibration presentation will be described. There are two kinds of performances, namely, a role object vibration performance A and a role object vibration performance B, which are normal advance notices for the role object vibration performance. Both vibration effects are effects in which a common accessory (upper effect device 2) vibrates.

FIG. 21(a) is a diagram showing a table relating to the character object vibration effect A. FIG. The role object vibration effect A may be performed during the execution of the super (SP) reach or may be performed during the execution of the special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in this table, the expectation level of the jackpot is 40% when the role object vibration effect A is performed during the execution of the super (SP) reach, and is performed during the execution of the special super (SPSP) reach. The expected jackpot is 55%. In this way, the role object vibration effect A is a normal notice effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit varies depending on the execution timing. In addition, in the role object vibration effect A, an image related to the vibrating role object (upper effect device 2) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 before the production (vibration) is started.

FIG. 21(b) is a diagram showing a table relating to the character object vibration effect B. As shown in FIG. The role object vibration performance B may be performed during variable display of decorative patterns for super (SP) ready-to-win or during variable display of decorative patterns for special super (SPSP) ready-to-win. In the above-described role object vibration production A, only one execution timing is prepared for one decorative pattern variable display, whereas in the role product vibration production B, one decorative pattern variable display is executed. Multiple timings are available. The degree of expectation of a big hit differs for each execution timing thereof. That is, in the variable display of decorative patterns in which super (SP) ready-to-win is performed, when the character object vibration effect B is performed at the start of the fluctuation of decorative patterns, the degree of expectation for a big hit is 70%, and the ready-to-win state is the first. is established (before the development of super reach), the expectation of the jackpot is 35%, and during super reach (after the development of super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern) When performed, the expectation of a big win is 45%, and when performed during the temporary stop display of the combination of decorative patterns representing failure (during execution of the resurrection performance), the expectation of a big win is 100%. be. Since the expectation of a big hit is 100%, the temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols representing a loss means that the resurrection effect that finally results in a big win is being executed. In addition, in the variable display of decorative patterns in which special super (SPSP) reach is performed, during super reach means after developing into super reach and before developing into special super reach, and is called during special super reach. Execution timing has been added. "During special super reach" means after the development to special super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, and when the role object vibration effect B is performed during the special super reach, a big hit is achieved. 55% expected. In addition, in the role object vibration performance B, the vibration period of the vibrating role object (upper stage effect device 2) is the same even if the execution timing is different.

In the table shown in FIG. 21, "during reach" may be when the reach is established, or may be during reach fluctuation. Further, "during SP reach" may be during the development of super reach or during fluctuation of super reach. Furthermore, "during SPSP reach" may be when the special super reach is developing, or may be when the special super reach is fluctuating.

Also, the role object vibration effect B may be executed at a timing when the role object vibration effect A is not executed. That is, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, during the ready-to-win state in which the ready-to-win state is first established and during the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the loss (during the execution of the resurrection effect), the role vibration effect A is not executed. This is the execution timing of the object vibration effect B.

Furthermore, the role object vibration effect A and the role object vibration effect B have the same manner of vibration (vibration mode), but may be different. For example, the character object vibration effect A repeats short vibrations, whereas the character object vibration effect B may end with one long vibration.

Also, the role object vibration effect A and the role object vibration effect B may be effects in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates instead of the upper effect device 2 . Alternatively, the character object vibration effect A may be an effect in which the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the character object vibration effect B may be an effect in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates. In addition, the production device that vibrates with the role product vibration production A and the role product vibration production B may be provided on the front frame door 106 .

In addition, the degree of expectation of the big hit shown in FIG. 21 depends on the game state (for example, the probability variation gaming state, the time saving gaming state, the non-probability variation gaming state, the non-time saving gaming state, or a combination of these), and may change, It may be the same regardless of the game state.

22A and 22B are diagrams showing, step by step, a case where the role object vibration effect A is performed and a case where it is not performed. In the example shown in FIG. 22, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

In FIG. 22, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208. As shown in FIG. This upper effect device 2 is a character that descends from the initial position by button notice (see FIG. 17 (7) and FIG. 19 (36)), but it also performs vibration effects at the initial position.

FIG. 22(1) shows a scene in which "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" indicating a failure is displayed still.

In FIG. 22(2), the variable display of decorative symbols is started. Also, the shift movement of the pending icon has been completed, and the icon that was the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 22(2) is an icon with a red display mode.

In FIG. 22(3), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. Next, in FIG. 22(4), it develops into super (SP) reach, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. The decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(5) displays a lord and an enemy samurai facing each other, and a vibration effect-related image 2hg related to the upper effect device 2 is displayed at the top of the display screen. It is This vibration effect-related image 2hg is a tutorial-like image, and includes an arrow display 2hg1, a character display that draws attention to the upper effect device 2, and a text message such as "If you vibrate, you have a great chance." Further, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is an image that draws the player's attention to the upper effect device 2 and also an image that draws the player's interest in the upper effect device 2 .

It should be noted that there may be a case where a suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration effect related image 2hg may be displayed is executed before the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed. This suggestive effect may be a display effect, a sound effect, or a light-emitting effect. appears, gradually materializes, and finally becomes an arrow display 2hg1. In addition, it may disappear without being materialized. In this case, the vibration production related image 2hg is not displayed, and the character object vibration production A is not executed. Also, even if the arrow display 2hg1 is displayed (even if the suggestive effect is executed), the attention is drawn to the upper effect device 2 and the character display such as "If you vibrate, you have a great chance" is not displayed. 2hg may not be displayed.

In FIG. 22(6) continuing from FIG. 22(5), the upper effect device 2 at the initial position starts vibrating after the vibration effect-related image 2hg disappears. The decoration pattern display device 208 displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other, and also displays the effect display of "great chance" to expect a big hit. The upper effect device 2 continues to vibrate until the super ready-to-win effect ends (until temporary stop display of decorative symbols is performed). The character object vibration production A performed here by the upper production device 2 is a normal notice with an expectation of a big hit of 40%. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(7) displays the state of the lord winning over the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative patterns for a big win such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. is temporarily stopped, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. The upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 22(7) continued to vibrate until immediately before this, but stops vibrating at the timing of FIG. 22(7) and is in a stationary state. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(8), the combination of the decorative designs of the 2R probability variable jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

Note that the vibration of the upper effect device 2 may end before the effect display of "Big Chance", which makes the player expect a big win.

Also, even if the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed, the character object vibration effect A may not be executed. Furthermore, the expectation of a big win may be higher when the role object vibration effect A is executed after the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed than when the role object vibration effect A is not executed. .

In addition, the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (Fig. 22 (2)), and is displayed as the execution timing of the role object vibration effect A during the super reach, when the super reach develops (Fig. 22 ( There may be a case of vibrating at the timing of 4)) and a case of vibrating at the timing after the development of super reach (timing of FIG. 22 (6)). That is, the role object vibration effect A may be started at different timings during super reach or during special super reach.

On the other hand, in FIG. 22(6′) continuing from FIG. 22(5), after the vibration effect-related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 in the initial position does not start vibrating, and the character object vibration effect A is executed. This is an example that did not exist. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(6') displays the situation after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(7'), the appearance of the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai is displayed. The combination is temporarily stopped. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(8'), the combination of the decorative designs that are not winning is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing step by step another example continued from FIG. 22(3).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(4) continuing from FIG. 22(3), it has developed into a super (SP) reach. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(5''), the lord and the enemy samurai face each other, but the vibration effect-related image 2hg shown in FIG. 22(5) is displayed. not

In FIG. 23 (6''), the upper effect device 2 in the initial position is vibrating. The decoration pattern display device 208 displays the situation after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other. In this example, the vibration period of the upper effect device 2 is short, and the upper effect device 2 is stopped before the super ready-to-win effect ends. The character object vibration production performed by the upper production device 2 here corresponds to the character object vibration production B, and the expectation of a big hit is greater than that of the character object vibration production A carried out in FIG. degree is a little high. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(6'') does not display the effect display of the big chance shown in FIG. 22(6). In the role object vibration production B, the vibration production related image 2hg is not displayed before execution, the vibration period is shorter than that of the role object vibration production A, and the production display of the big chance is not displayed. It can be said that it is a normal notice that a player familiar with this pachinko machine 100 knows from the above. On the other hand, it can be said that the accessory vibration effect A is a normal notice that even a player who is not familiar with the pachinko machine 100 can understand.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (7'') displays the state of the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, the decorative pattern of the jackpot such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. combination is temporarily stopped, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(8), the combination of the decorative designs of the 2R probability variable jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing step by step another example in which the role object vibration effect B is performed. Also in the example here, it is a state in which it is a non-time-saving game state (special low probability normal low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

FIG. 24(1), like FIG. 22(1), shows a scene in which "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" indicating a failure is displayed still. In FIG. 24(2), similarly to FIG. 22(2), the variable display of decorative patterns has started. The variable display of decorative symbols here is a variable display that develops into super reach as shown in FIGS. 22(1) to 22(4). At the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, the upper production device 2 vibrates, and the role object vibration production B is executed. Here, the role object vibration effect B is a normal notice with an expectation of a big hit of 70%. In the character object vibration performance B, the expectation of a big hit is higher at the execution timing at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern than during the reach or the super reach. When the variable display of the decorative symbols is disclosed, it is not known whether the reach will be established in the first place, but the players who are familiar with the pachinko machine 100 have high expectations from the start of the variation when the upper production device 2 vibrates when the variable display is disclosed. Therefore, attention will be paid to the variable display of the decorative pattern. In FIG. 24(3), a super ready-to-win effect is developed, and in FIG. 24(4), a combination of decoration symbols for a probability variable jackpot such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is definitely displayed.

FIG. 24(3-1) shows a state continued from FIG. 22(2), in which the ready-to-win effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. That is, normal reach has started. During this reach, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the role object vibration effect B is executed. Here, the role object vibration effect B is a normal advance notice with an expectation of a big hit of 35%. In FIG. 24 (3-2), it has developed into a super ready-to-win effect, but in the same figure (4'), a combination of decorative symbols that are lost such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed as a fixed display. .

FIG. 24(6-1) shows a state continued from FIG. 23(5''), in which the super ready-to-win effect is completed, and the lord appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(6-1). is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of unsuccessful decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed temporarily. Also, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the character object vibration effect B is executed. Here, the character object vibration effect B is a normal notice with a 100% expectation of a big hit, and in the following FIG. 24 (6-2), a wipe effect as a revival effect is started. After the wipe-in shown in FIG. 24 (6-3) is completed, the wipe-out is performed, the wipe effect that is the resurrection effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. -Decoration 13-Decoration 7", a combination of decorative symbols for a normal jackpot is fixedly displayed.

Both the character object vibration effect A and the character object vibration effect B described above are effect actions suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win. It may be possible to perform a vibrating motion different from the The vibrating motion irrelevant to the degree of expectation of the big win may be weaker than the vibrating motion of the role object vibration performance A or weaker than the vibrating motion of the role object vibration performance B. Alternatively, the vibrating motion irrelevant to the degree of expectation of the big win may have a vibrating time shorter than that of the role product vibration performance A or shorter than that of the role product vibration performance B. Furthermore, the vibrating action unrelated to the degree of expectation of the big hit may be an informing action executed when a predetermined number of pending games is accumulated. For example, the upper effect device 2 may perform the vibrating motion when the number of reservations one step before the reservation full tank reaches 3. This vibrating motion suggests a stopping strike.

Next, a button vibration effect in which the effect button 136 vibrates will be described. The button vibration effect is also a normal notice effect, similar to the role object vibration effect. Also, in the button vibration effect, as in the character object vibration effect B, an image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed. This point is different from the button announcement in which the button image 136a and the like shown in FIG. 17(6) and FIG. 19(35) are displayed.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a table regarding button vibration effects. The button vibration effect may be executed by the variable display of decorative patterns in which the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are combined. Even in the case of normal reach, it is executed at the time of the first temporary stop by the pseudo continuous effect (see FIG. 12 (2)), and the expectation of the big hit at this execution timing is 13%.

In addition, the button vibration effect is performed during the variable display of decorative patterns in which super (SP) reach is performed, and during the variable display of decorative patterns in which special super (SPSP) reach is performed. There are cases where it is done on The button vibration effect is also a normal notice with different expectations of a big hit for each execution timing. That is, in the variation display of the decorative pattern in which the super (SP) reach is performed, the expectation of the big hit is 50% when the button vibration effect is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the first time by the pseudo-continuous effect. If it is displayed during the temporary stop display of the second temporary stop display, the expectation degree of the big win is 13%, and if it is executed during the second temporary stop display by the pseudo-continuous effect, the expectation degree of the big win is 15%. The degree of expectation for the big win is 30% when the game is displayed during the third temporary stop display by the performance, and the degree of expectation for the big win is 36% when the game is performed when the super ready-to-win is developed. In addition, if it is performed during the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the failure (during execution of the resurrection effect), the expectation of the big hit is 100%. This means that the degree of expectation for a big win is 100%, as in the character object vibration production B, and that the revival production is being executed to eventually lead to a big win. In addition, in the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing at the time of development of the special super reach is added. When the button vibration performance is performed at the time of development of this special super reach, the expectation of a big hit is 48%.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the button vibration effect. Also in this example, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed hitting is recommended. Also, in FIG. 26, a production button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative design display device 208. As shown in FIG.

26(1) to 26(9) are the same as the effects in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIGS. 12(1) to 12(9). That is, in FIG. 26 (1), the variable display of the decoration pattern of the special figure 1 is started. In FIG. 26(2), a pseudo-continuous effect is started, and a pseudo-continuous symbol (decorative symbol written as "NEXT") indicating the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left symbol is displayed. "Decoration 6" is displayed temporarily in the area 208a, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the temporary stop display is performed for the first time. FIG. 26(2) shows how the production button 136 is vibrating at the time of the first temporary stop display, and the button vibration production is performed. The degree of expectation for the big hit of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 13%. In FIG. 26(3), the display screen is blacked out, and in subsequent FIG. 26(4), the situation immediately before the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect is started is shown. In FIG. 26(5), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative design is started.

When the effect button 136 vibrated by the button vibration effect is pressed within a predetermined period, a response display (for example, a character display of "It's hot") may be displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

In FIG. 26(6), the decorative symbol "decoration 5" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and in FIG. 26(7), the decorative symbol "decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It is In the following FIG. 26(8), the decorative pattern of "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b, and the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking). (variable display), and in (9) of FIG.

26(a) to 26(e) are the same as the effects in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIGS. 13(18) to 13(22). That is, in FIG. 26 (a), the variable display of the special figure 1 decoration pattern is started under the stage of the back, and in the same figure (b), the reach state is established, and the right pattern is also displayed in the left pattern display area 208a. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the area 208c as well. In FIG. 26(c), it has developed into a super reach. FIG. 26(c) shows how the effect button 136 is vibrating during the development of super reach, and the button vibration effect is being performed. The degree of expectation for the big hit of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 36%.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(d), an animation is displayed in which the lord who defeated the enemy samurai is projected, and normal jackpot decorations such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" are displayed in the center of the display screen. A combination of symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in FIG.

In the button vibration effect described above, an image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed, the vibration period is shorter than that of the character object vibration effect A, and the effect display corresponding to the button vibration effect is not displayed. It can be said that this is a normal notice that a player familiar with the pachinko machine 100 who has been familiar with the vibration presentation can understand.

Note that the button vibration effect may be an effect in which the decision button 1903 vibrates instead of the effect button 136 .

Also, the effect button 136 may perform the same vibrating motion as the vibrating motion irrelevant to the degree of expectation of the big hit described in the explanation of the upper effect device 2 .

According to the above description,
"First vibrating means [eg, upper effect device 2] capable of executing a first vibrating motion [eg, character vibration effect A];
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208];
A game machine comprising
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibrating means [for example, a vibration effect related image 2hg] before the execution of the first vibrating motion is started. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it becomes difficult for the player to overlook the first vibrating motion. In addition, the player advances the game in anticipation of the first vibrating motion, which may enhance the interest in the game.

The first vibrating motion may be a performance motion or a notification motion.

The first image may be an image that draws attention to the first vibrating means, or an image that draws attention to the first vibrating means.

Further, the display means may start displaying the first image before the execution of the first vibrating motion is started and after the ready-to-win effect is started [for example , FIG. 22(5)].

In addition, before the display of the first image is started, an effect (for example, a display effect or a sound effect) that suggests that the first image may be displayed It may be possible to execute a lighting effect). Note that the first image may not be displayed even when this effect is executed.

again,
"The display means terminates the display of the first image before the execution of the first vibrating motion is started [for example, FIG. 22 (5)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first vibrating means is capable of executing a second vibrating action [for example, character object vibration effect B],
The display means does not display the first image before execution of the second vibration operation is started [for example, FIG. 23 (6'')],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Further, the second vibrating motion may be a motion in which the vibration start timing is different from that of the first vibrating motion [for example, at the time of fluctuation opening shown in FIG. During temporary stop], the vibration may be different from the first vibrating motion.

again,
"The first vibrating motion lasts longer than the second vibrating motion [for example, the vibration continues until the end of the super ready-to-win effect (until the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed)]] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``Equipped with a second vibration means different from the first vibration means [for example, the production button 136 and the enter button 1903],
The second vibrating means is capable of executing a third vibrating action [for example, button vibrating effect],
The display means does not display an image related to the second vibrating means before the execution of the third vibrating motion is started [for example, FIG. 26(1) and FIG. None are shown in ],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

"Even when the first image is displayed on the display means, the first vibrating means may not perform the first vibrating operation." The expectation of a big win may be higher when the first vibrating motion is performed after the image of is displayed than when the first vibrating motion is not performed.

"The first vibrating means is operated at a first timing [for example, 22 (4) timing when super reach develops], and a second timing later than the first timing [for example, timing after super reach develops ( 22 (6) Timing)]]. That is, the first vibrating means causes the first image to appear on the display means. After being displayed, the execution of the first vibrating motion may be started at a different timing.

"The first vibrating means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on the door member [for example, the front frame door 106], and can vibrate when the door member is closed or opened. Also, the first vibrating means is arranged in the door member, and the first vibrating operation started when the door member is closed is performed when the door member opens. It may continue even if it is in a state of Alternatively, the first vibrating means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member, and is opened even when the door member is closed. However, it may also vibrate. The first vibrating means [for example, the upper stage effect device 2] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member, and the above-described vibrating means started when the door member is closed. The first vibrating motion may be continued even when the door member is opened. The second vibrating means [for example, effect button 136 or enter button 1903] is arranged on the door member [for example, ball storage tray door 108], and is open even when the door member is closed. However, it may also vibrate. In addition, the second vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136 or the enter button 1903] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door with ball storage tray 108], and the operation starts when the door member is closed. The first vibrating motion may be continued even when the door member is opened. Alternatively, the second vibrating means [eg, the lower effect device 3] is arranged in a member [eg, the main body 104] different from the door member [eg, the ball storage tray door 108], and It may vibrate whether the door member is closed or open. The second vibrating means [for example, the lower effect device 3] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member [for example, the ball storage tray door 108]. The first vibrating operation started when the door member is closed may be continued even when the door member is opened.

"The display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] displays the third image [for example, the character display of ] may be displayed. "The third image may be a display in response to the operation of the first vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136].

"The first vibrating means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is capable of executing a fourth vibrating action, and the first vibrating action [for example, the character object vibration effect A] is an expectation of a big hit. 21 (a)], and the second vibrating motion [for example, the role object vibration effect B] is also the expected degree of the big hit [for example, the expectation level of FIG. Expectation level of big win shown in (b)], and the fourth vibration action may not be a performance action suggesting the expectation level of big win." may be weaker than the first vibrating motion and may be weaker than the second vibrating motion. Alternatively, the fourth vibrating motion may have a vibrating time shorter than that of the first vibrating motion and shorter than that of the second vibrating motion. Furthermore, the fourth vibrating operation may be a notification operation that is executed when a predetermined number of holds are accumulated.

Next, a background effect, which is a normal notice effect similar to the button vibration effect, will be described. Here, the execution (start) timing of the background effect and the degree of expectation for the big win will be described.

FIG. 27(a) is a diagram showing a table relating to background effects. The background effect may also be executed (started) with variable display of decorative patterns in which reach effect and pseudo-continuous effect are combined. The background effect is not executed during the variable display of decorative patterns in which normal reach is performed, but during the variable display of decorative patterns in which super (SP) reach is performed and in the variable display of decorative patterns in which special super (SPSP) reach is performed. may be executed (started) during That is, in the variation display of the decorative pattern in which the super (SP) reach is performed, the expectation of the big hit is 20% when the background effect is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the second time by the pseudo-continuous effect The degree of expectation for the big win is 25% when the game is performed during the temporary stop display, and the degree of expectation for the big win is 35% when the game is performed during the super reach. Also, in the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing during the special super reach is added. If the background effect is performed during this special super reach, the expectation of the big win is 40%.

Next, the mini character production will be explained. The mini-character effects include effects in which the mini-character A appears and effects in which the mini-character B appears. Furthermore, there may be an effect in which different types of mini-characters appear. The mini-character production is also usually a preview production, but the expectation of the big hit is the same even if the mini-character that appears is changed. However, if the appearing mini-character changes, the degree of expectation for the big win may also change. Also, the execution timing is the same even if the mini-character is changed, but the execution timing may be changed if the mini-character is changed. Furthermore, the displayed mini-character may be changed depending on the production mode, or the displayed mini-character may be changed as a result of an internal lottery regardless of the production mode.

FIG. 27(b) is a diagram showing a table relating to mini character effects. This table is common to mini-character A and mini-character B.

As with the character object vibration presentation, the mini character presentation may be performed during execution of the super (SP) reach or may be performed during the execution of the special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in the table of FIG. 27(b), in the mini character effect, a plurality of execution timings are prepared for one time variation display of decorative symbols. However, the expectation of a big hit is common at any execution timing. That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols in which super (SP) reach is performed, even if the mini character effect is executed before the reach state is established for the first time, during super reach (after developing into super reach) Even if it is performed before the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols, or during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols, the expectation of the big win is 55%. In addition, in the variable display of decorative patterns in which special super (SPSP) reach is performed, during super reach means after developing into super reach and before developing into special super reach, and is called during special super reach. Execution timing has been added. "During special super reach" refers to the period after development to special super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern. Even if the mini character presentation is performed during this special super reach, the expectation of the big win is 55%.

28A and 28B are diagrams showing an example of a mini character effect step by step. In the example shown in FIG. 28, it is a state in which it is a non-time-saving gaming state (a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

FIG. 28(1) shows a scene in which "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" indicating a failure is displayed still. In the following FIG. 28(2), the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(2), a mini-character related image mcg related to mini-character effects is displayed in the upper part of the display screen. This mini-character-related image mcg includes a notice that the mini-character production may start and a character display such as "It will be hot if it appears" like a tutorial.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(3), the mini-character-related image mcg disappears, and the decorative designs are changed at high speed in all of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c. A part of the mini-character Amcr is beginning to appear above the left end of the display screen. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(4), the entire mini character Amcr is displayed. This mini character Amcr is a rocket character and is flying to the right.

In FIG. 28(5), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. The mini character Amcr continues to fly, but lowers its altitude.

In FIG. 28(6), normal reach is developed into super reach. The mini character Amcr is displayed even on the screen developed into super reach, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly. Next, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(7), the lord and the enemy samurai face each other while facing each other, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly, but this time it is increasing its altitude.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(8), the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other is displayed, and the mini character Amcr is still displayed. The mini character Amcr that appears before the ready-to-win state is established in FIG. 28(3) continues to be displayed until the super-ready-to-win effect ends, that is, until the temporary stop display starts. The decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(9) displays the appearance of the feudal lord winning over the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, the normal jackpot decoration patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 13-decoration 1" are displayed. The combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the mini character Amcr has disappeared, but the mini character Amcr was displayed until just before this. In FIG. 28 (10), the combination of decorative symbols for the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

Although the mini character Amcr disappears at the same time as the end of the super ready-to-win effect (the display of the temporary stop display starts), it may disappear before the end of the super ready-to-win effect (before the temporary stop display is displayed). Moreover, after appearing, the mini character Amcr may disappear once and then reappear.

FIG. 28(3′) is another example continued from FIG. Unlike the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in (3) of FIG. In FIG. 28(5'), the ready-to-win effect was started, and the mini character Amcr did not appear before the ready-to-win was established. In FIG. 28 (7'), the super reach effect is performed, but the mini character Amcr does not appear. Eventually, the super reach effect ends without the mini character appearing, and the decoration pattern shown in FIG. 28 (9'). The display device 208 displays the lord's defeat by the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of false decoration patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is displayed temporarily. In FIG. 28 ( 10 ′), the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the character object vibration effect B and the mini character effect are performed. In FIG. 29, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 29 (7-1), after developing into the super ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other while also displaying the mini-character-related image mcg. Note that the mini-character related image mcg may be displayed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 28(2). The decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(7-2) also shows the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, but the mini-character-related image mcg disappears and the mini-character Amcr appears above the left end of the display screen. are beginning to appear. Also, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2) is vibrating, and the character object vibration effect B is being performed. In this way, during the super reach, there are cases where the mini character effect and the character object vibration effect B are executed in parallel. By doing this, two types of normal notices overlap to enable a hot presentation. However, the execution of the mini character presentation and the execution of the character object vibration presentation B are not started at the same time. That is, the start timing of execution of the mini character effect and the start timing of execution of the character object vibration effect B are deviated from each other. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (8''), the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other is displayed, and the rocket mini character Amcr is flying toward the right. Note that the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (8'') is in a stationary state after finishing the vibration. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9''), the mini character Amcr disappears, and a combination of false decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. Although not shown in the figure, a combination of the decorative symbols that are lost such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed as a fixed combination, as in FIG. 28(10').

Fig. 29 (7-1') shows the same state as Fig. 29 (7-1), and the mini-character related image mcg is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 after developing into the super ready-to-win effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(7-2'), the mini-character related image mcg disappears, and a part of the mini-character Bmcu begins to appear above the left end of the display screen. On the other hand, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2') does not vibrate and remains stationary at the initial position. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (8''), the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other is displayed, and the mini character Bmcu is flying toward the right. The mini character Bmcu is a UFO character. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(9-1), the mini character Bmcu disappears, and a combination of false decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. there is In this example, the mini-character Bmcu appears, but the same applies when the mini-character Amcr appears. Further, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (9-1) is vibrating, and the character object vibration effect B is being performed.

In the following FIG. 29 (9-2), the temporary stop display is finished, and the wipe effect, which is the resurrection effect, is started. Note that the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (9-2) is in a stationary state after finishing the vibration. Wipe-in is completed in the following FIG. 29 (9-3). When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out starts, and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and in FIG. 29 (9-4), the wipe effect ends, and the normal jackpot decoration such as "decoration 1-decoration 13-decoration 1". The symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the resurrection effect is successful. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (10''), the combination of decorative designs for the normal jackpot is displayed as determined.

As described above, unlike during super ready-to-win, the mini-character effect and the character object vibration effect B are not executed in parallel during the losing pattern temporary stop. This is because if the role object vibration presentation is performed during the temporarily stopping of the losing symbols, the big win is confirmed, so that the game is sufficiently excited even if two kinds of normal notices are not given.

Also, in the character object vibration effect B, even if the start timing is different, the effect execution period length (vibration period length) is the same effect. The length (display period length) is also a different effect. In other words, if the mini character effect is started before the ready-to-win state is established, the execution period is from (3) to (9) in FIG. ) to immediately before (9'') in FIG.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing decorative design variable display,
Production means capable of executing multiple types of production [for example, upper production device 2, decorative pattern display device 208],
A game machine comprising
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit [for example, a character vibration effect B],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit [for example, a effect executed by the decorative pattern display device 208 such as a mini character effect],
The effect means can execute the first effect at one start timing among a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 21(b)] in one decorative symbol variation display. is a
The effect means can execute the second effect at one start timing among a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27(b)] in one decorative symbol variation display. is a
The first production is a production that suggests a different degree of expectation for a big win depending on which start timing it is executed [for example, the degree of expectation for a big win shown in FIG. 21(b)],
The second production is a production in which the suggested jackpot expectation does not differ regardless of the start timing [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 27(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, two types of presentations may improve the interest of the game.

again,
"When the effect means executes the first effect [for example, character object vibration effect B] at the first start timing [for example, a certain timing during Super Reach], the second effect [for example, , mini character A effect] can be executed in parallel with the first effect [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2)],
When the effect means executes the first effect at a second start timing [for example, a certain timing during temporary stoppage of the losing pattern], the second effect is executed in parallel with the first effect. Impossible [for example, the mini character effect disappears when temporarily stopping the wrong symbol] [for example, FIG. 29 (9-1) when the mini character Amcr appears instead of the mini character Bmcu],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The effect means can perform the first effect [for example, character vibration effect B] in the decorative pattern variation display that results in a big win [eg, FIG. For example, FIG. 29 (7-2)] is executable,
In the above-mentioned second production [for example, mini character A production], and also in the variable display of decorative patterns that result in a big hit [for example, just before (3) to (9) in FIG. 28], decorative patterns that result in failure Also in the variable display [for example, immediately before (7-2) to (9'') in FIG. 29],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

"The first production is a production in which the execution period length of the production does not differ even if the start timing differs, and the second production is a production in which the execution period length of the production differs depending on the start timing. [For example, if it is started before reach is established, it is from FIG. 28 (3) to just before (9) in FIG. Until just before figure (9'')]."
"One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a mini character B effect] that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the effect means is configured to perform the third effect once. It is executed at one start timing selected from a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. Even if the start timing is different, the implied degree of expectation for a big win is the same [for example, the degree of expectation for a big win shown in FIG. 27(b)]. It may be the same as the degree of expectation for a big hit suggested by the second production.” Alternatively, the second production may include a plurality of production modes [for example, a production mode in which the mini character Amcr appears and a production mode in which the mini character Bmcu appears. Aspect] may be a certain production.

"The effect means performs the first effect even in the decorative symbol variation display that results in a big hit [eg, FIG. 24 (2)] and in the decorative symbol variation display that results in a loss [eg, FIG. ] can be executed, but it may be impossible to execute at a specific timing in the decorative symbol variation display that will result in a loss [for example, timing during execution of a resurrection effect that will ultimately result in a loss] [for example, FIG. 27 ( b) multiple execution timings]."
"The effect means may not start the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect at the same time." It may deviate from the start timing of execution of the second effect.

"The effect means may include first effect means [eg, upper effect device 2] and second effect means [eg, decorative pattern display device 208]." The first effect means can execute the first effect, and the second effect means can execute the second effect. Alternatively, the effecting means may include a plurality of types of effecting means, and the first effect and the second effect may be executed by different effecting means. At least a part of the first effect and the second effect can be executed in common by some effect means [for example, the game board lamp 442 or the game frame lamp 452] [for example, the Light is emitted at the start of the first effect, and light is emitted at the start of the second effect].

"The first production [for example, the role object vibration production B] is the second game state The expectation of the suggested jackpot may be higher than when executed in one game state [for example, non-probability variable game state, non-time-saving game state, or normal game state (non-probability-variable and non-time-saving game state)]. "The second effect [for example, the mini character effect] is also more likely to suggest a big win when executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state." The degree may be high." Alternatively, the first effect may be executed in the second game state or in the first game state. The expected degree of winning may be the same. Whether the second effect is executed in the second game state or the first game state, the suggested degree of expectation for a big win is the same. good too. The second game state may be a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In addition, although the term "game state" is used here, in the case of having an effect mode based on the game state, the game state can be read as the effect mode.

In addition, the production means may set the first production to a plurality of start timings in the reach fluctuation display [for example, when the reach is established, when the super reach is developed, after the development of the super reach, when the special super reach is developed, and after the development of the special super reach. ], and the effect means may execute the second effect at a plurality of start timings in reach fluctuation display [for example, when reach is established, super reach At development, after development of super reach, at development of special super reach, after development of special super reach].

FIG. 30 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the time-saving game state ends and shifts to a non-time-saving game state from a little before the time-saving game state ends.

Each figure shown in FIG. 30 shows a decorative pattern display device 208, a lamp TL during shortening of working hours, a lamp RL indicating hitting to the right, and a lamp HL during high probability. For each lamp, black represents the lit state and white represents the off state (same up to the example shown in FIG. 40). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(a) is provided with a fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or during symbol stop) and notifying the number of reservations, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, in the upper right part, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 1 is provided, and in the lower right part, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 2 is provided. In addition, the notification area during the design fluctuation of the general pattern and the pending number display area of the general pattern may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched to the reserved number indicated by special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is special figure 2 reserved lamp 220 is consistent with the number of holds indicated by In addition, in the special figure 1 symbol fluctuation notification area, while the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, according to the result, for example, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped with "○", and if it is lost, it will be displayed with "X". Stop is displayed. Also, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In addition, the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 1, and this is the display mode corresponding to the symbol variation display and the stop display of the special figure 2 changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the 4th pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, a preview notice or a notice regarding the pattern fluctuation display during execution you can go The fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG.

Further, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(a), the decorative design combinations of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" are stopped and displayed. A mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the center lower part of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed. In FIG. 30(a), since the symbol variation display of the special figure has ended, the variation icon disappears and is not displayed.

The control state (game state) shown in FIG. 30(a) is a time-saving game state. More specifically, it is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The time-saving middle lamp TL shown in FIG. 30(a) is on, and the high-probability middle lamp HL is off. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 11(b), right-handed hitting is recommended in the time-saving game state, and the right-handed hitting display lamp RL shown in FIG. 30(a) is also lit. In addition, on the left side of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed during the time-saving game state even after the symbol variation display of the special figure is finished, and continues to be displayed even after shifting to the demo screen. It should be noted that the right-handed indicator lamp RL also continues to light up after the transition to the demo screen.

The time-saving game state in FIG. 30 (a) is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) started after the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the V-passing switch VC, or 950 times the special figure loss continues. It is a time saving game state (b time saving game state) started. The background of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(a) is the background of the castle town representing the time-saving gaming state. Moreover, the state in FIG. 30(a) is a state in which the time-saving game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state when the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed four more times. At the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(a), characters "4 left" are displayed as a time-saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time-saving game state continues only four times. In addition, the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) started after the jackpot game ended, the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) where the 950 times special figure loss started continuously (b time-saving game state), suddenly winning and starting Depending on the reduced working hours gaming state (c reduced working hours gaming state), the background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may differ, and the display mode of the remaining number of working hours gaming state display may also differ. In addition, the background in the decorative pattern display device 208 may be different between the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability general figure high probability state, and the display mode of the time saving game state remaining number display is also different. good too.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the time-saving gaming state, a pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 .

In the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a reserved icon representing the reservation of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of reservations of special figure 2 is represented by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2 in addition to the number of lights of special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the starting information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest starting information (oldest winning) may be called the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest starting information may be called the second pending icon, and so on. In the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the pending icons are displayed side by side, and the pending icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the pending icon on the right) is the older pending icon.

In FIG. 30(a), three reserved icons h21, h22, h23 of special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2, and these three reserved icons h11, h12, All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default appearance is a round, non-patterned, white appearance. In the drawings, white is represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. The pending icon suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pre-reading notice depending on the display mode. In other words, it suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display in which the suspension represented by the suspension icon is digested. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. In addition, you may make it suggest that a big-hit expectation degree is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. In the following description, when the default display mode is used, the description to that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 30(a), in order to make it easier to understand that the four pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the pending icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

In FIG. 30(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. That is, in this figure, the pattern variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 3) not shown in the drawing is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the decoration The variable display of the pattern has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 2, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 2. Further, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h21, which was the first suspended icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. The display mode of this variation icon is also the default display mode (round, unpatterned, white display mode). In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 3".

Furthermore, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the display of the music selection display MC that can select the music output from the speaker 120 is started above the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. be. The song selection display MC displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. This music output will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35 and later.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(c), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a losing decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". Note that the music selection display MC disappears once each time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and is resumed each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In FIG. 30(d), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 2. Further, the pending icon is shifted to the right by one, and only one pending icon h21 is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 2".

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(e), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814".

In FIG. 30(f), the symbol variable display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed variable. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 2. In addition, the pending icon is shifted to the right by one, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the number of pending is 0. Also, the pending icon h21 in the default display mode, which was the first pending icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 30(f) has a red display mode different from the default display mode. In the drawings, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. A variation icon h0 in a red display mode suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the current symbol variation display is 50%, and a so-called normal notice is being executed. In addition, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed, and next to it, " LAST" is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of times remaining in the time saving game state displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 disappears and is not displayed, but it may be displayed as "remaining 1". Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(f), the display of the right-handed second display RH2, which is different from the right-handed first display RH1 and prompts the right-handed player, has started to be displayed. The right-handed second display RH2 describes that the reservation of the special figure 2 is aimed at the second special figure start port 232 (electric chew) in the figure of the right arrow. This is a notification that recommends that you acquire a special figure 2 remaining reservation that suddenly leads to a short-time election. At the stage of FIG. 30(f), the number of reservations of special figure 2 is 0, but even if the number of reservations of special figure 2 is full (4 pieces), the right-handed second display RH2 is displayed. Furthermore, from the speaker 120, a right-handed notification of urging right-handed hitting and accumulating the hold of the special figure 2 (audio output of “right-handed and accumulating the hold”) is started. Music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 . It should be noted that while the sound for informing the player to hit the right hand is being output, the output sound of the song 1 may be reduced, or the sound of the song 1 may be completely silenced. Whether it is a right hitting notification by the right hitting second display RH2 or a right hitting notification from the speaker 120, the execution is started when the symbol variation display of the last special figure that can maintain the time saving game state is started. . The display start timing of the right-handed second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the last special symbol, or the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. It may be after the timing. In addition, the start timing of the right-handed notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the symbol of the last special symbol, or the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. It may be the timing after the second special figure display device 214 (not shown) (see FIG. 3) from the start of the symbol variation to the timing before the variation display of the decorative symbol is started good.

In FIG. 30(g), there are two wins at the second special figure start port 232, the number of reservations of special figure 2 increases by two, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 The indicated numerical value is 2, and the two reserved icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 30(h), a ready-to-win state is entered in the variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, there is one more winning at the second special figure start port 232, the number of reservations of special figure 2 is increased by one, and the number shown in the number display area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is 3 , and the third pending icon h23 is also displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 30, although it entered the ready-to-win state in FIG. 4” is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "434". In addition, at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(i), the character "end" is displayed, which indicates that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state has ended. . When the symbol variation display of the last special figure is finished, the right-handed first display RH1 and the right-handed second display RH2 which have been displayed until then disappear and become non-display. In addition, the right-hand hitting information that has been output from the speaker 120 has ended. It should be noted that these end timings may be simultaneous with the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, or may be after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Alternatively, it may be the timing before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern after the end of the variable display of the last special symbol, or the timing before the end of the variable display of the last special symbol. good too. The reservation of special figure 2 has finally accumulated up to 4 and has reached the full state. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. h24 is also displayed.

In addition, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden (deleted) according to the accumulation of four reservations of special figure 2, and a display that suggests that four reservations of special figure 2 have accumulated ( For example, a character display indicating that the tank is full on hold, a character display indicating that preparation is complete, or the like may be performed. In this case, if four reserves of the special figure 2 are not accumulated by the end of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden according to the end of the variable display of the decorative patterns. It should be like this (it should be deleted).

In FIG. 30 (j), it shifts from the time-saving game state to a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time saving middle lamp TL shown in FIG. 30(j) is turned off, and the high accuracy middle lamp HL is also turned off. When shifting from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, if the reservation of the special figure 2 remains, the special figure 2 remaining reservation is preferentially digested because it is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. As described above, there is a possibility that the time saving pattern shown in FIG. 5(c) is stopped and displayed only for the special figure 2 symbol variation display performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time saving gaming state. . During the period (hereinafter referred to as "pull-back period") during which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time saving game state is performed, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is It becomes a special background. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the main character, Tonosama, is running, and the characters are displayed as "one-shot reversal".

In addition, in the withdrawal period, since the special figure 2 remaining reservation is digested, in order to more clearly notify how many more special figure 2 reservations are left, the special figure 2 reservation icon display area 282 is in the time saving game state are displayed continuously from In addition, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 may be displayed together, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 may not be displayed.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(j), variable display of the decorative design is started, and three reserved icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is also 3, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 2.

Also, as described with reference to FIG. 11 (b), left-handed hitting is recommended in a non-time-saving game state, and the right-handed display lamp RL shown in FIG. 30 (j) is also extinguished, and the decoration shown in FIG. The symbol display device 208 does not display the right-handed first display RH1 either. However, in the pullback period, while the non-time-saving gaming state, the left-handed information that encourages left-handed hitting is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 30 (j), even if it shifts from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state, the left hitting notification is not executed in the pullback period. In FIG. 30(k), the hitting to the right is continued, and the game ball is being shot toward the right area of the game area 124. In FIG. It should be noted that the same applies if the player changes from right-handed to left-handed but happens to be right-handed due to excess momentum. In the non-time-saving game state, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228 provided in the right area, left-handed notification (left-handed second display LH2) is executed (Figure 31(m), etc.). In FIG. 30(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228, but the left hitting notification is not executed. This is because the special figure 1 does not have a time-saving pattern, as explained using FIG. Not recommended. However, since it is extremely rare to win the special figure 2 start opening 232 by winning per normal figure when hitting to the right, hitting to the right is not recommended. Ultimately, it is a good idea not to shoot the game ball during this pullback period.

It should be noted that, even during the recovery display in the case where power failure occurs during the pull-back period and the power is restored, the left-handed information is not executed. Also, during this recovery, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228, left-handed information is not executed. On the other hand, when power failure occurs in a non-time-saving game state that is not a pull-back period, and during recovery display in the case of recovery, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, left-handed notification is executed. . It should be noted that, similarly to the left-handed hitting notification to be described later with reference to FIG. , or the notification may be only a left-handed notification sound. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(m), the combination of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", which is a losing decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed, and the winner was not suddenly selected in a time-saving manner. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "541".

In FIG. 30(n), the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. In the 4th pattern of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern/holding number display area 284, the blinking of the display of "-" has started. In this FIG. 30 (n), the number of Toku-zu 2 remaining reservations is reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the Toku-zu 2 reservation number display area in the fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 2, Toku-zu 2 Two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of .

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(o), the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 5", which is a losing decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed, and here too, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "245".

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 30 step by step.

In FIG. 31(a) continuing from FIG. 30(o), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. In the 4th pattern of the special figure 2 in the 4th pattern/holding number display area 284, the blinking of the display of "-" has started. In this FIG. 31 (a), the number of special figure 2 remaining reservations is also reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the special figure 2 reservation number display area in the fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 1, and the special figure 2, only one suspended icon h21 is displayed in the suspended icon display area 282 of FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(b), the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 9-decoration 5" which is a losing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and here too, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "195".

In FIG. 31(c), the symbol variation display of the last special figure 2 remaining reservation is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. In the 4th pattern of special figure 2 in the 4th pattern/reservation number display area 284, the display of "-" starts blinking, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2 becomes 0, and the special figure 2 is reserved No pending icon is displayed in the icon display area 282 .

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(d), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 6-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. rice field. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "261". With this FIG. 31(d), the pullback period ends. In this example, the pullback period is the period shown in FIGS. 30(j) to 31(d). It should be noted that the pullback period is a period of different length depending on the number of special figures 2 remaining pending and the time length of the symbol variation display of each special figure.

In FIG. 31(e), the background of the decorative design display device 208 has changed because the withdrawal period has ended. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(e) displays a background (white background with no pattern) representing the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, because the withdrawal period has ended, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

Further, when the pullback period ends, the left-handed first display LH1 for prompting left-handed is displayed over the left-handed informing period. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(e), a left hitting first display LH1 is displayed on the variable display of the decorative design. The display mode of this left-handed first display LH1 is a display mode in which the character "left-handed" is written in a figure in which a leftward arrow is deformed. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts left-handed hitting notification (audio output of “Please hit left”) to prompt left-handed hitting. In FIG. 31(e), the reserved design variable display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. In the 4th pattern of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reservation number display area 284, blinking of the display of "-" is started, and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 is 0. In addition, even one pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the newly displayed special figure 1.

The player sees the left-handed first display LH1, starts left-handed, and aims at the special figure 1 starting port 230. - 特許庁In FIG. 31 (f), the number of reservations of special figure 1 is increased by two, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1 in the 4th pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 2, and the reservation icon display of special figure 1 The area 281 displays two pending icons h11 and h12.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(g), the combination of "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "923". In addition, the number of reserved special figures 1 is further increased by one, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figures 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 3, and the reserved icon display area 281 of special figures 1 A third pending icon h13 is also displayed.

In FIG. 31(h), the symbol variable display of the new special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed variable. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 2, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. In addition, the pending icon is shifted to the left by one, and two pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Even if the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 is started, the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and is not displayed. The left-handed notification period, which starts when the withdrawal period ends, is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and may end within a single symbol variation display depending on the time length of the special figure symbol variation display. For example, it may be displayed across multiple symbol variation displays. In addition, the left-handed notification period may be ended with a predetermined number of times (eg, once) symbol variation display, or a predetermined number of special figures 1 pending (eg, one or four) When accumulated, it ends. You may make it In such a case, the left-handed informing period becomes an indefinite period.

In addition, when power failure occurs and is restored during the left-handed informing period, the execution of the left-handed first display LH1 is continued. Further, the hitting-to-left notification in the hitting-to-left notification period may be performed only by the hitting-to-left first display LH1, or may be performed only by the hitting-to-left notification from the speaker 120. FIG.

In FIG. 31 (i), the number of reservations of special figure 1 is further increased by two, and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1 in the fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 becomes 4, and the reservation icon of special figure 1 The display area 281 displays four pending icons h11 to h14.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(j), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "729".

In FIG. 31(k), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 3, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. In addition, the pending icon is shifted to the left by one, and three pending icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 31(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure starting port 228. In FIG. That is, hitting to the right is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 31(m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a left-handed second display LH2 prompting a left-handed player. This left-handed second display LH2 is a display in a display mode different from the left-handed first display LH1, and is a character display such as "Please return to left-handed". The left-handed second display LH2 is displayed for a certain period of time each time a right-handed hit is detected. It should be noted that while the left-handed second display LH2 is displayed, the speaker 120 may notify the left-handed player (for example, return to the left-handed one).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (n), the left-handed second display LH2 disappears, the reservation of the special figure 1 increases again, and the reservation number display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 The numerical value shown in the area is 4, and four pending icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x". At the same time, the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "924".

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 31 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, while the number of special figure 2 remaining reservations was four, in the example shown in FIG. 32, the number of special figure 2 remaining reservations is only one. That is, in FIG. 32(f), the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 was started with 0, and the last special figure 2 design fluctuation display that can maintain the time saving game state is won only once in the special figure 2 start port 232 didn't. As a result, the special figure 2 in the reserved number display area of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. The numerical value is 1, and only one reserved icon h21 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 32(j), it shifts from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). In FIG. 32(j), the design variation display of the special figure 2 remaining reservation, which is the only one, is immediately started, and the decorative design is displayed in variation. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, right hitting is detected (Fig. 32 (k)), but left hitting second display LH2 is not executed (Fig. 32 (l)), and eventually, special figure 2 remaining pending symbol fluctuation The display ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(m) stops displaying the combination of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", which is a failing decorative pattern. In this example, too, he was not elected in a short period of time. With this FIG. 32(m), the pullback period ends. The pullback period in this example is the period of FIGS. 32(j) to 32(m), which is shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. However, if the period length of the symbol variation display of only one special figure 2 remaining pending is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. Also, even if the number of special figures 2 remaining pending is 2 or 3, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 31, or shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. There may be a withdrawal period.

In the example shown in FIG. 32 as well, the pullback period has ended, so that the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a background representing a non-time-saving gaming state (background with no pattern on a white background), as shown in FIG. 32(n). is doing. In addition, because the withdrawal period has ended, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

Furthermore, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started due to the end of the withdrawal period. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts left-handed hitting notification (audio output of “Please hit left”) to prompt left-handed hitting. In FIG. 32(n), the variable display of the reserved design of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variable display of the decorative design is also started, and in the same figure (o), the variable display of the decorative design is continued. is doing.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

In FIG. 33(a) continuing from FIG. 32(o), the withdrawal period ends and the first special figure 1 symbol variation display ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3 ” is stopped and displayed. In this example, after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started), the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230 is performed until the symbol variation display is finished. There was not one time, and I could not save the reservation of special figure 1. Therefore, immediately following FIG. 33(a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, and as shown in FIG. 33(b), the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. Even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, the left-handed first display LH1 remains displayed until the left-handed notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), ends. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(b) continues to display the left-handed first display LH1. During this time, the player continues to hit left and continues to aim for winning the special figure 1 start opening 230, but there is still no winning to the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the left hitting notification period ends soon. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and becomes non-display (FIG. 33(c)). Even if the left-handed first display LH1 disappears, there is no winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in FIG. It is started, and the decorative pattern also starts the variable display.

In the example shown in FIG. 33 as well, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the regular pattern starting port 228 (FIG. 33(g)), as shown in FIG. A left-handed second display LH2 prompting left-handed hitting is displayed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which there is no withdrawal period. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 31 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the number of special 2 remaining reservations is 4, and in the example shown in FIG. 32, the number of special 2 remaining reservations was 1, whereas the example shown in FIG. So, the number of special figures 2 remaining pending is 0. That is, in FIG. 34 (f), the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 was started with 0, and the symbol variation display of the last special figure 2 that can maintain the time-saving game state is won once in the special figure 2 start port 232. there was no As a result, shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth design / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. The numerical value is 0, and no single pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, if you shift from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. , The background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state changes to a white background with no pattern representing the non-time-saving game state. Also, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. Furthermore, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts left-handed hitting notification (audio output of “Please hit left”) to prompt left-handed hitting.

In FIG. 34 (j), one remaining special figure 1 pending design variation display is started, and the decorative design variation display is also started, and in the following figure (k), the special figure 1 design The variable display is finished, and the decorative pattern display device 208 stops displaying the combination of "decorative pattern 9-decoration 2-decoration 3" which is a failure. In the example shown in FIG. 34, as in the example shown in FIG. 33, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 starts) until the symbol variation display ends. During this time, there was no winning to the special figure 1 start port 230, and the reservation of special figure 1 could not be accumulated. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately following FIG. For example, 30 seconds), there is no winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the demonstration display is started on the decorative pattern display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(l) displays a design demonstration. In the demo display, a setting menu is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 by operating the production button 136 shown in FIG. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122 from the setting menu. As shown in FIG. 34(l), even after transitioning to the demonstration display, the left-handed first display LH1 is continuously displayed until the left-handed informing period elapses.

As shown in FIG. 34(m), when the left-handed informing period elapses, the left-handed first display LH1 disappears and becomes non-display. In this example, there is still no winning to the special figure 1 starting gate 230, and the demonstration display continues to be displayed. While the demo display is being displayed, game balls are continued to be shot, and when it is detected that the game balls have passed through the normal figure starting port 228 (Fig. 34(n)), as shown in Fig. 34(o). Then, a left-handed second display LH2 prompting a left-handed player is displayed in the demo display screen. Note that the left-handed information in the demonstration display may be output with a sound together with the display, or may be output with only the sound instead of the display. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 34, the pattern demonstration is displayed as the demonstration display, but the same applies when the animation demonstration is displayed.

In addition, the notification of hitting to the right can be made by blinking the right lamp of the frame lamp 122 in addition to the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the voice output from the speaker 120 . In addition, left-handed information can also be given by the display on the decorative pattern display device 208, voice output from the speaker 120, or by blinking the left lamp of the frame lamp 122. FIG.

Furthermore, the left-handed first display LH1 in the left-handed notification period and the left-handed second display LH2 displayed when the game ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228 were different in display mode. , may have the same display mode. Also, the display period length of the left-handed first display LH1 and the display period length of the left-handed second display LH2 are different, but they may be the same.

In addition, the notification of the playing method during recovery from the power failure is executed depending on the actual game state. For example, if it is recovery during the pullback period, even if hitting to the right is detected, hitting to the left is not reported. On the other hand, if it is a recovery during the pattern fluctuation of the special figure in the non-time-saving gaming state, if hitting to the right is detected, hitting to the left is performed.

Next, the selection of music will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. Music that can be selected changes depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this pachinko machine 100, by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. Usually, the player does not know which setting value is set. Which set value is set is an important matter of interest for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, setting suggestions suggesting set values are performed using music. The predetermined condition is not established until the big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining reservation being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving gaming state, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In other words, the predetermined condition is to win a big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state.

As a predetermined condition, instead of hitting the jackpot with the special figure 2 remaining reserved, or in addition to hitting the jackpot with the special figure 2 remaining reserved, the result of the look-ahead while the jackpot game is on hold will result in a big hit again. It may also be that there is a reservation (so-called reservation renso). Alternatively, it may be to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time-savings). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for the player is the special figure A, which is a 10R probability variable jackpot. On the contrary, the jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (2R probability variable jackpot special figure B) or the shortest number of times (3R normal jackpot special figure b) Alternatively, it may be winning the 10th consecutive jackpot.

Also, in place of or in addition to the setting suggestion suggesting the setting value, a piece of music suggesting that there is a hold during the jackpot game that will result in a second big win as a result of a look-ahead (so-called hold renso). It may be a song that suggests the type of hit (for example, whether or not it has a probability change, or that a round promotion will occur, etc.), or it may be a song that suggests that it is the 10th consecutive big hit. It may be music. Furthermore, suggesting game information by music is useful if the game information is usually unknown to the player.

FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not met.

The time when music can be selected is a jackpot game state, a time-saving game state, and a non-time-saving game state. Music cannot be selected while the special symbol is stopped, and thus music cannot be selected even during the demonstration display. However, music may be selected from the setting menu described above.

It should be noted that it is also possible to select a song even while the special figure is stopped.

In addition, when the predetermined condition is not met, since the music suggesting the set value cannot be selected, the music that can be selected does not change regardless of which set value (settings 1 to 6) the pachinko machine 100 is set to.

The songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied are five songs from song 1 to song 5. FIG. Music 1 is the default music, and this music 1 is set when the RAM is cleared. In addition, this music 1 is set each time the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 30, music 1 is set from the beginning, but when music other than music 1 is selected, music 1 is set at the timing of FIG. 30(j).

FIG. 35(b) is a diagram showing a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is established when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 pattern fluctuation display performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining reservation being digested in a non-time-saving game state, and one song is selected by internal lottery during the winning jackpot game. Result selected and set. That is, it is not selected by the player, but automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100 side. The selection rate shown in FIG. 35(b) corresponds to the distribution rate by lottery. The songs selected here include songs suggesting setting values. The song 6 is not a song suggesting a set value like the songs 1 to 5, but the song 7 is a song suggesting that the setting is 3 or more, and the pachinko machine 100 actually has a setting of 3 or more. If not set, it will not be selected. The song 8 is a song suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and is not selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6. Incidentally, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, song 6 is selected with a probability of 100%.

Even after the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the predetermined condition may be satisfied again, and the songs are similarly selected by lottery when the predetermined condition is satisfied the second time and thereafter. The same piece of music may be selected when the predetermined condition is met a plurality of times. Note that it is also possible to increase the number of songs so that songs that have been selected once are no longer selected.

The number of songs described above with reference to FIG. 35 is an example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from the speaker 120 is smaller when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, under this relationship, songs 1-5 may include songs 6-8. Furthermore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only one song is selected by lottery. good.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a list of songs selected after a predetermined condition is met even once. It should be noted that FIG. 35(b) is referred to for the jackpot game state when a predetermined condition is established, and the jackpot game state in FIG. It's about.

In the non-time-saving game state, as described with reference to FIG. 35(a), songs 1 to 5 can be selected by the player operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190. . Further, if the song 6 is selected by lottery even once in the jackpot game started by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the song 6 is released until the RAM is cleared, and the songs 1 to 5 are played. Similarly, selection can be made by operating the operation key unit 190 . Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once and the music 7 or the music 8 is selected, the music 7 and the music 8 are not released in the non-time-saving game state and cannot be selected by the player's operation. That is, when the song 6 is released, by repeating the operation of the upper button 191, the song titles of the songs 1 to 6 are displayed in order on the song selection display MC, and the song title of the song 6 is displayed. When the upper button 191 is operated in this state, the music title returns to music 1, and the music titles of music 7 and music 8 are never displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place.

In the time-saving game state, or in the big-hit game state in which the predetermined condition was not established (for example, in the big-hit game state that was started by winning the big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state), music 1 to music 5 Up to, can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as in the non-time-saving gaming state. Also, if song 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same way as songs 1 to 5. FIG. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, even if the predetermined condition is met, the songs 7 and 8 will not be selected by lottery and will not be released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 3 or 4, the song 7 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is established, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190 is operated. However, since the song 8 is not selected by lottery, it is not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 5 or 6, music 7 or music 8 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied. can be selected by operating As described above, if songs 6 to 8 are selected by lottery once in a time-saving game state or a jackpot game state in which a predetermined condition is not satisfied, the player can thereafter select them. However, if it has not been selected by lottery even once, the player cannot select it. Similarly here, when music 6 is released and music 7 and music 8 cannot be selected, by repeating the operation of the upper button 191, the music selection display MC displays the music titles of music 1 to music 6. When the upper button 191 is operated in a state in which the song title of song 6 is displayed, the song title returns to song 1, and the song title of song 7 and the song title of song 8 are displayed in the song selection display MC. never.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing stepwise an example different from the example shown in FIG. 30, continuing from FIG. 30(h).

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(a) continuing from FIG. 30(h), as with the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. A combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the character "End" is displayed, which indicates that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is completed.

Also, the third pending icon h23 shown in FIG. 37(a) has changed from the default display mode to a golden display mode. On the drawings, gold is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. The hold icon in the gold display mode corresponds to a so-called pre-reading notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is 75% in the hold symbol variation display represented by the hold icon.

In FIG. 37 (b), as in FIG. 30 (j), the state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, and the high probability The middle lamp HL is also extinguished. In addition, the background of the decorative design display device 208 is changed to a special background on which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC is started. Music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120 .

Furthermore, the display mode of the first pending icon h21 shown in FIG. 37(b) is changed from the default display mode to the time saving display mode. This time-saving display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode that suggests that you will suddenly win a time-saving game. It is a display mode changed from the display mode. That is, the pre-reading notice suggesting that the winner will suddenly be elected in a short time is started when the pullback period is started. It should be noted that the gold-colored pending icon is the second pending icon h22.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(c), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. The symbol variation display is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. In the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the time saving display mode is displayed, and the normal notice is being executed. In other words, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for winning suddenly in a short period of time is 75% in the current pattern variation display. It should be noted that the gold-colored pending icon is the first pending icon h21.

In FIG. 37(e), the time saving pattern (special figure D) shown in FIG. 5(b) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(e), characters indicating success are displayed, and three "decorations 11" (time-saving decorative patterns) shown in FIG. 5(c) are stopped and displayed side by side. In other words, it is reported that the winner was suddenly elected in a short time. However, although it was suddenly won in a short time, it did not win a big hit, so the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 in the 4th symbol/holding number display area 284 is stopped and displayed with "x". Furthermore, the mini-symbols are stopped at a particular combination of numbers (321) rather than the decoration 11 combination. This particular combination is a combination that is stop-displayed only when winning a time-saving symbol that is not stop-displayed in the event of a loss or a big hit.

By suddenly winning in a short time, the game is shifted to a short time game state without going through a big winning game. The time-saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 37(f) is lit, and the background of the decorative design display device 208 is the castle town background representing the time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, characters "949 remaining" are displayed as a time saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time saving game state continues 949 more times. In addition, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is lit by shifting to the time-saving gaming state. In addition, the gold display mode icon, which was the first reserved icon h21 until now, has become the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbols has started. The variation icon h0 in the gold display mode is a normal notice suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the pattern variation display started here is 75%. Note that the music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120, and the display of the music selection display MC has also started.

In FIG. 37(g), the variable display of decorative symbols enters a ready-to-win state. Then, in FIG. 37 (h), it develops into super reach, and the holding icon display area 282 and the variable icon display area 280 of the special figure 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also shows the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state such as "remaining 949". It's gone. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, instead of the song 1 that has been output until now, the song A dedicated to super reach is being output.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(i), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative designs are displayed in the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c. The combination is displayed stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of "777". The big hit here is the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining reservation, but the predetermined condition is not established because it is suddenly elected in a short time and shifts to a short time gaming state.

In FIG. 37(j), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a character display saying congratulations on the jackpot. In addition, since the variable winning hole 234 is arranged in the right area, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is lit. Note that the lamp TL during the time saving is turned off. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening effect), a right-handed second display RH2 is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. The right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which a letter indicating "throw to the right" is displayed between right-pointing arrows vertically spaced apart, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a right-handed notification sound of "strike to the right".

Further, since the jackpot game is started without the predetermined condition being satisfied, at least the tunes 1 to 5 can be selected, and the tune selection display MC is displayed except for a part of the period during the jackpot game. In the music selection display MC, a display UD imitating the up button 191 and the down button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed. Music can be selected by operating the down button 192 . The song selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. It should be noted that while the sound for informing the player to hit the right hand is being output, the output sound of the song 1 may be reduced, or the sound of the song 1 may be completely silenced.

In FIG. 37(k), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Also, the speaker 120 no longer outputs the sound for notifying that the player hits to the right, and only the music 1 is output. Furthermore, the music animation according to the music 1 output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decoration design display device 208 where the 1st round was started. The music video here is an animation in which the main character, the lord, demonstrates swordsmanship to music 1, and the lyrics of music 1 are also displayed. A song selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 37(l), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variable jackpot, the V shutter VS is opened in the second round (final round), and a V prize can be obtained. At the beginning of the second round, the decorative design display device 208 displays the character display "Aim for the V" prompting the game ball to pass through the V passage switch VS, and the music video is continuously displayed. However, the music selection display MC has disappeared and is not displayed. That is, in the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained, it is not possible to select a song. It should be noted that the speaker 120 continues to output music 1 .

In FIG. 37(m), the game ball has passed through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing V winning notification to notify that the V winning has been won. In other words, it is notified that the state will shift to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. When the V prize notification is performed, the music video is hidden, but may continue to be displayed together with the V prize notification. On the other hand, the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, but the speaker 120 may output the V prize notification sound together with the music 1, or may output the V prize notification sound instead of the music 1. . Also, even after winning the V prize, it is not possible to select a song until the 2nd round is over, but once the V prize is won, it is possible to select a song during the remaining period of the 2nd round. may

In FIG. 37(n), the end effect of the big win game is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the character display of the end of the big win. Further, the right hitting first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the jackpot game, and is also displayed in this ending effect. Also, the song 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also output in this ending effect. Furthermore, in the ending effect, the music selection display MC is resumed, and the music can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192 . However, in the ending effect, it may be arranged such that selection of music cannot be performed in the same manner as in the round in which the V prize can be obtained. Thus, during a part of the period during the jackpot game, it is not possible to select a song. Also, during the period in which the super reach is being performed as shown in FIG. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 37A, 37C, and 37I, music selection cannot be performed even while the special symbol is stopped. Also, when the specific mode is set or when the setting menu is displayed, music cannot be selected.

By hitting right during the period of the jackpot game, the second special figure starting port 232 is also won, and up to four special figure 2 reservations are accumulated. When the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the holding of the special figure 2 accumulated up to four is digested, and the variable display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(o), the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state is displayed, and the variable display of decorative patterns is started. In addition, at the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, characters "119 remaining" are displayed as a time saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time saving game state continues 119 more times. Furthermore, the time-saving medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 37(o) are also lit. Further, a right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and a right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, a song selection display MC showing the song title “song 1” is also displayed, and song 1 is being output from the speaker 120 .

FIG. 38 shows in stages an example in which the first pending icon h21 of the pending icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is completed is in a gold display mode. It is a diagram.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, the third reserved icon h21 of the reserved icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure was completed was a gold display mode, but in this example, the first is displayed in gold. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 37 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

The first hold icon h21 in the gold display mode shown in FIG. 38(a) is a variation icon h0 in the gold display mode when digestion of the special figure 2 remaining hold is started (when the withdrawal period starts). (see FIG. 38(b)).

Here, looking at the result of the look-ahead, the currently performed special figure 2 symbol variation display (symbol variation display corresponding to the gold display mode variation icon h0) is a big hit symbol variation display. Also, in the special figure 2 symbol variation display (symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h21 shown in FIG. 38(b)) to be started next, it is suddenly elected in a short time. As a result of this look-ahead, since a big hit is won in the preceding symbol variation display, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h21 is performed in the time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state obtained by the big win. is not suddenly renewed in a short time, but in order to give priority to the short time gaming state obtained by the big hit, the winning of the short time is suddenly invalidated. For this reason, it is not displayed in the time-saving display mode like the first pending icon h21 shown in FIG. 37(b), and in FIG. 38(b), the first pending icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. It is That is, even if there is a reservation for winning a winning schedule for the time saving pattern, if there is a reservation for winning a big hit before the reservation is consumed, the pre-reading notice for the time saving pattern is prohibited.

In FIG. 38(c), the variable display of decorative symbols enters a ready-to-win state. Then, in FIG. 38(d), super reach has developed, and music A dedicated to super reach is being output from the speaker 120 in place of music 1 that has been output until now. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(e), the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. is doing. The big hit here is the big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time saving game state, and the predetermined condition is established.

In FIG. 38(f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of music 8 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD, and it is informed that this music 8 has been selected by lottery. Music 8 is also output from the speaker 120 . The song 8 is a song suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and the player who knows this knows that the pachinko machine 100 currently being played is a high setting pachinko machine. In addition, the song 8 is a song that may be selected only for the pachinko machine 100 that is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, and is a rare song because the selection rate is low. In some cases, the interest in the game improves. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(f) displays the first right-handed display RH1 and the second right-handed display RH2, and the speaker 120 outputs the tune 8 and "strike to the right". A right-handed notification sound is also output.

In FIG. 38(g), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Also, the speaker 120 no longer outputs the sound for informing the player to hit to the right, and only the music 8 is output. Furthermore, the music animation according to the music 8 output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decoration design display device 208 where the 1st round was started. The music video here is an animation in which the loincloth-style bancho poses to music 8, and the lyrics of music 8 are also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 37(k) and 37(l), the lyric display of music 1 without setting suggestion is the first color character display (for example, black character display), but the lyric display of music 8 suggesting high setting. is the second color lettering (eg, gold lettering). Note that the lyrics of the song 7 may be displayed in a third color (for example, red characters). In addition, the music selection determination display MD is also displayed in FIG. 38(g).

In FIG. 38(h), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 38, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music video is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is not displayed. It should be noted that the speaker 120 continues to output music 8 .

In FIG. 38(i), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decoration symbol display device 208 performs V-winning notification to notify that the V-winning has been won, and the music video is hidden. Also, the music selection determination display MD remains hidden. On the other hand, music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 38(j), the end effect of the jackpot game is started, and the display of the music selection determination display MD is restarted. Also, the song 8 is continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also output in this ending effect.

In FIG. 38 (k), the transition to the time-saving game state is performed, and the variable display is started after the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Further, when a predetermined condition is met and the music 8 is selected by lottery, the music selection display MC displaying the name of the music 8 is also started in the time-saving game state. Music 8 is continuously output from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game.

In FIG. 38(l), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is a failure. . This stop-displayed special figure 2 symbol variation display is a suspension symbol variation display represented by the first suspension icon h21 at the time when the digestion of the special figure 2 remaining suspension is started (when the pullback period is started). be. As described above, originally, it was a pattern variation display that suddenly won a time saving, but since the jackpot with a time saving was won first, the time saving pattern is not stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. , It does not shift to the time saving game state based on the time saving pattern. That is, it can be said that the stop display of the time saving pattern is regulated in the time saving game state, and the time saving pattern is a pattern that is stopped and displayed only in the non-time saving game state. However, the time saving pattern may be stop-displayed even in the time saving game state.

In FIG. 38 (m) following from (l), the number of remaining times of the time-saving game state is decreased by one, the characters "remaining 118" are displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the same figure ( In n), the combination of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4", which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 38(o), the number of time-saving game state remaining number display is further decreased by one, the characters "remaining 117" are displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started. A music selection display MC showing the title of the music 8 is displayed, and the output of the music 8 is continued from the speaker 120 as well.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing step by step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed.

In the examples so far, the operation key unit 190 was not operated even when the music selection display MC was displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 39, the operation key unit 190 is operated. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 38 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(a), the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stop-displayed, and the symbol variation display of the last special pattern that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is displayed. has ended.

In FIG. 39 (b), as in FIG. 30 (j), the state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off. The middle lamp HL is also extinguished. In addition, the background of the decorative design display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background displaying the character display of one-shot reversal, and the display of the music selection display MC displaying the title of music 1 has started. Music 1 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 39(c), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(d), the song name of song 2 is displayed on the song selection display MC, and song 2 is output from speaker 120 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the up button 191 was pressed. Output is started. That is, the music is determined after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) has elapsed since the operation key unit 190 was operated. It should be noted that if the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the predetermined time elapses, the name of the song on the song selection display MC is changed, and the song output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Also, the music may be determined when the OK button of the operation key unit 190 is pressed even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

In FIG. 39(e), the variable display of decorative patterns enters a ready-to-reach state, and in subsequent FIG. Dedicated music A is output. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(g), the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (special figure B) is won. and a predetermined condition is established.

In FIG. 39(h), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the song title of song 6 is displayed on the song selection determination display MD. Also, music 6 is output from the speaker 120 . Music 6 is a music that does not suggest setting. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(h) displays the first right-handed display RH1 and the second right-handed display RH2, and the speaker 120 outputs the tune 6 and "strike to the right". A right-handed notification sound is also output.

In FIG. 39(i), the first round has started, and the speaker 120 no longer outputs the sound for informing of hitting to the right, and only music 6 is output. Furthermore, on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has started, a music video corresponding to the music 6 output from the speaker 120 is displayed. The music video here is an animation in which the manabu style bancho poses in accordance with music 6, and the lyrics of music 6 are also displayed. Also in FIG. 39(i), the music selection determination display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 39(j), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 39, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music video is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD has disappeared and is not displayed. It should be noted that the speaker 120 continues to output music 6 .

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VS, and the V winning notification is not performed, and in FIG. In the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection determination display MD is resumed. Also, the song 6 is continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also output in this ending effect.

In FIG. 39 (l), the transition to the time-saving gaming state, the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display is started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the castle town background representing the time-saving gaming state, The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In addition, since there was no V prize, the probability variable state is not established, and the high-probability middle lamp HL remains extinguished.

Further, when a predetermined condition is established and the music piece 6 is selected by lottery, the display of the music piece selection display MC displaying the name of the music piece 6 is started in the time-saving game state. Music 6 is output from the speaker 120 continuously from the jackpot game.

In FIG. 39(m), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(n), the default song name of song 1 is displayed on the song selection display MC, and when song 1 is selected after a predetermined time has elapsed, song 1 is output from speaker 120. be started. In this example, songs 7 and 8 have not been released, and song 6 returns to song 1.

In addition, if a specific operation (for example, pressing the lower button 192, pressing the OK button for a long time, etc.) is performed during a specific period (for example, the opening effect period during the jackpot game shown in FIG. 39(h)), a predetermined Music 6 may be released even if the conditions are not met. Even in this case, it is desirable not to release the setting-suggesting music.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing step by step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game started without satisfying a predetermined condition.

FIG. 40(a) is different from the example shown in FIG. 38 so far, the symbol variation display of the special figure ends in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". , the combination of decorative symbols that are lost is stopped and displayed. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(a), the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on a white plain background representing the non-time-saving gaming state. Three pending icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, of which the first pending icon h11 is displayed in gold. In addition, the time-saving medium lamp TL, the right-handed indicator lamp RL, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL are all extinguished. Further, music 1 is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 40(a).

In FIG. 40(b), the suspended design variable display indicated by the first suspended icon h11 in gold display mode is started, and the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(b) starts the variable display of the decorative design. It is Also, in the variation icon display area 280, a gold variation icon h0 is displayed, and a normal notice is given.

In FIG. 40(c), a ready-to-win state is entered in the variable display of decorative symbols. Then, in FIG. 40(d), it develops into super reach, and music A exclusively for super reach is output from the speaker 120 instead of music 1. FIG. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(e), the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 3R probability variable jackpot (special figure a) is won. there is Since the big hit here is not the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining reservation, the predetermined condition is not established. Also, in this example, this big hit is the first hit, and the predetermined condition has not been satisfied even once after the power is turned on (after the RAM is cleared).

In FIG. 40(f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music selection display MC is displayed instead of the music selection determination display MD. In the music selection display MC shown in FIG. 40(f), the title of "music 1" is displayed, and music 1 is output from the speaker 120 along with the voice output of the notification of hitting to the right.

In FIG. 40(g), the first round has started, and the speaker 120 no longer outputs the right-handed notification sound, and only music 1 is output. Also, on the decorative design display device 208, a music selection display MC displaying the title of "music 1" is displayed, and a music video corresponding to the music 1, in which the main character, Lord appears, is displayed. .

As shown in FIG. 40(h), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times during the first round. In the music selection display MC, the display is switched in order of the music title of music 2, the music title of music 3, the music title of music 4, and the music title of music 5, and "music 5" is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(i). is displayed, and a music video with lyrics display corresponding to music 5 is displayed. Also, music 5 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 40(j), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(k) where the second round has started, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "Music 1" is displayed, and a music with lyrics display corresponding to the music 1 is displayed. A video is displayed. That is, it returns to the music piece 1 that was output in the first round, and here, the output of the music piece 1 is restarted from the continuation of the music piece 1 that was output halfway in the first round. However, each time a piece of music is selected, the piece of music may be output from the beginning.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(l) where the third round of the final round has started, the music selection display MC disappears and music selection cannot be performed. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the moving image of the song with the lyrics display corresponding to the song 1 . Also, music 1 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 40(m), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decoration symbol display device 208 performs V-winning notification to notify that the player has won the V-winning, and the music video is hidden. Also, the music selection display MC remains hidden. On the other hand, music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 40(n), the end effect of the jackpot game is started, and the display of the music selection display MC is restarted. Also, music 1 is output from the speaker 120 .

In FIG. 40 (o), the transition to the time-saving game state is completed, and the variable display is started with the special figure 2 reserved. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the music selection display MC in which the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is also displayed from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game to the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game. It is continuously output without interruption when switching to the state. In addition, when switching from the jackpot game to the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state, even if there is no change in the music, the music is not output continuously, and the music is restarted after being interrupted. When switching to the game state or the time-saving game state, the music may be output again from the beginning.

In addition, the predetermined condition for music selection was to win a big hit in the special figure 2 pattern fluctuation display performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in a non-time-saving gaming state, but for example, a 10R big hit During the game, music can be selected as shown in FIGS. 40(h) and 40(j), and during the 2R jackpot game, music cannot be selected as shown in FIG. good too.

Also, the present invention can be applied to a so-called one-and-two mixed machine that wins a small hit in a time-saving game state and wins a big hit by entering the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
"A game machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.],
The notification means, in the non-time-saving gaming state, first notification prompting the launch of the game ball toward the first game area [for example, left-handed first display LH1 and left-handed second display LH2, etc. ],
The notification means, when the first condition [for example, there are four special figure 2 remaining pending] is established when shifting from the time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state,
The first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that is performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state period (pull-back period) in which the first notification is not executed during the periods of FIGS. 30(j) to 30(o) to 31(d) [for example, FIG. ,
After the first period is over, the first notification [for example, left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed,
A playground characterized by 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give an appropriate notification according to the game situation.

In addition, said 1st information is always performed in said 2nd period.

Further, the notification means may not perform the first notification even when a power failure occurs during the first period and the power is restored thereafter.

again,
"The notification means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] is, when the second condition [for example, there is only one special figure 2 remaining hold] when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state If established,
After moving from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first notification in a third period shorter than the first period [for example, the period of FIG. 32 (j) to the same figure (m)] is not executed [for example, FIG. 32(l)],
After the third period is over, the first notification [ For example, left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed,
A playground characterized by 』
also explained.

In this game machine, too, it is possible to make an appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
``The notification means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] is, when the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, If the special figure 2 remaining reservation is 0], after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the second period [for example, the period of FIG. When executing one notification [for example, left-handed notification of left-handed first display LH1] [for example, if it is executed as shown in FIG. In some cases, the left-handed first display LH1 may not be executed immediately].
A playground characterized by 』
also explained.

In this game machine, too, it is possible to make an appropriate notification according to the game situation.

again,
"Second start opening [for example, second special figure start opening 232] arranged in the second game area [for example, right area],
Second symbol display means [for example, second special symbol display device 214] capable of executing second symbol variation display [for example, special symbol 2 symbol variation display] based on the winning to the second start port When,
with
The notification means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208], in the time-saving gaming state, the second notification [for example, right-handed first display RH1] prompting the launch of the game ball toward the second game area is to run
The notification means, the number of reservations indicating the number of reservations of the second symbol variation display [for example, the number notification in the number of reservations display area of the special figure 2, which is the lower left part of the fourth symbol / number of reservations display area 284] is to run
The notification means, the last second symbol variation display in the time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "last second symbol variation display".) During execution [for example, FIG. h)], a third notification [e.g., right-handed second display RH2], which is a notification mode different from the second notification and prompts the shooting of the game ball toward the second game area, is executed. is a
The notification means executes the third notification in the last second symbol variation display, and the number of pending numbers that has been executed before the start of the last second symbol variation display. It is executed without changing the notification mode of notification [for example, FIG. 30 (f) to (h)],
A playground characterized by 』
also explained.

In the last second symbol variation display, the player loses unless the holding of the second symbol variation display is accumulated. First, since the pending number notification is executed without changing the reporting mode, the player can confirm the pending number of the second symbol variation display. By executing a special notification such as the third notification, it is possible to emphasize the shooting of game balls toward the second game area and prevent the player from losing money.

The notification means may always execute the third notification during execution of the last second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notification means, in the non-time-saving gaming state after the second period has ended, in response to the fact that the game ball is being launched toward the second game area is detected to carry out one notification,
The notification means does not perform the first notification during the first period even if it is detected that the game ball is being shot toward the second game area.

again,
``The first start port [eg, the first special figure start port 230] arranged in the first game area [eg, the left region],
First symbol display means [e.g., first special symbol display device 212] capable of executing first symbol variation display [e.g., special symbol 1 symbol variation display] based on the winning to the first start port When,
with
The first symbol display means does not stop displaying the time saving pattern [for example, the time saving pattern (special figure D) shown in FIG. 5(b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time saving gaming state. is a
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbols in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 37(e)],
When the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the second pattern variation display, the time saving game state is shifted to without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 37(f)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even in the same non-time-saving game state, if there is a hold in the second symbol variation display, the time-saving pattern may be won, and compared to the case where there is no hold, the time-saving game state is entered again. likely to migrate. Therefore, the player is prevented from aiming at the first starting opening in vain by not performing the first notification.

In addition, it has a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice that suggests that the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed,
Said look-ahead notice means wins a certain kind of jackpot with a hold that is digested earlier than a hold of said second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") that stops and displays said time-saving symbols. If so, the pre-reading notice may not be executed for the second suspension.

In addition, when the reservation digested earlier than the second reservation wins the probability variable jackpot, even if the second reservation is canceled after the probability variable jackpot game, the time reduction based on the time reduction pattern. It may be one that does not transition to the game state.

That is, after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot is completed, the game state is shifted to the time saving game state, and the time saving pattern is not stop-displayed even if the second suspension is terminated. Moreover, it is already said time-saving game state at the time when said 2nd reservation was digested.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In an enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means to the game area can be ejected from the game area and supplied to the ejection means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table. The illustrated top plate 126 and bottom plate 128 are not provided.

As explained above, this enclosed pachinko machine encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use. It may be run on credit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a slot machine (rotating machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 41 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001 . Three reels (a left reel 1010, a middle reel 1011, and a right reel 1012) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 41) are housed in the center of the main body 1001. It is configured so that it can rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on belt-shaped members at equal intervals, and the belt-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 1010 to 1012. . As for the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 . The reel backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, near each of the reels 1010 to 1012, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

A winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line 1014 . A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five prize lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal prize line and a lower horizontal prize line are added. When 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line are valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right The five lines of the downward winning line and the right upward winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. A reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . In this embodiment, each time the insert medal button 1030 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three, two medals are inserted when the insert medal button 1031 is depressed, and three medals are inserted when the insert medal button 1032 is depressed. It is designed to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the prescribed number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by means of the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041, and the term "insertion" includes both. is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the accumulated number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010-1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010-1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. Also, the reel targeted by the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The payout button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting them from the medal payout port 1055 . The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A chance button 1100 as an example of operation means is provided on the right side of the medal insertion button 1032 . The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057 . In addition, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changed during the valid operation period of the chance button 1100 .

Information display button unit 1050 is provided with information display button 1046 . The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual game history information of the player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided below the stop button unit 1036. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062 .

A sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A production device 1060 is arranged above the front door 1002 , and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the production device 1060 . This rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right and left shutters 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 1000 (game display). (user side).

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the whole of the display screen. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Also, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be curved.

Further, although the present invention is exemplified by pachinko machines and slot machines as game machines, it is not limited to these, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, rock-paper-scissors game machines, smart balls, and the like.

In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the predetermined conditions for music selection are: winning the n-th consecutive bonus; (for example, the horizontal prize line in the middle) to win a bonus, win the 10th consecutive AT, win a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, For example, winning an AT that has the role of .

In addition, the jackpot game state in the example shown in FIGS. 30 to 40 is a bonus game state, ART state, AT state, etc. in the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. In addition, the time-saving game state becomes the ART state, AT state, etc. when the jackpot game state is the bonus game state, and the AT state, RT state, etc. when the jackpot game state is the ART state. .

Also, although the reset timing of the music release information was when the RAM was cleared, it may be reset when power is restored across dates, or may be reset at a specific time (for example, even if across dates). If power is restored by 6:00 a.m., resetting may be disabled.

Furthermore, when the power is restored from the power failure, the selected music is changed to a state in which the preset initial music is selected.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with sound output means [for example, speaker 120] capable of outputting music,
The sound output means can output music in a first advantageous state [for example, jackpot game state, bonus game state, ART state],
The first advantageous state is a state advantageous to the player,
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the special figure 2 pattern fluctuation display that is performed as a result of the special figure 2 remaining hold being digested in a non-time-saving game state, the result of looking ahead during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again There is a reservation that will be (so-called reservation renso), the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of times to save time), Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (e.g., the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or the jackpot with the smallest number of time-savings), winning the n-th consecutive jackpot, winning the n-th consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus with matching symbols (e.g. 7 red symbols), Winning a bonus with matching symbols on a specific winning line (e.g. middle horizontal winning line), Winning the 10th consecutive AT , a predetermined AT start condition (e.g., winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT with a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. The first number of songs that the sound output means can output in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. )] and the second number of songs that can be output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 1 song "1"] is different,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, when the predetermined condition is achieved, the number of songs differs from that when the predetermined condition is not achieved, thereby enhancing the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, and enhancing the game. Interest can be improved.

again,
``The second number of songs [e.g., 1] is a number smaller than the first number of songs [e.g., 5 or more and 8 or less].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By reducing the number of pieces of music that can be output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, the feeling of specialness in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. can be done.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
The sound output means is capable of outputting music even in the second advantageous state,
The second advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player, different from the first advantageous state [for example, a time-saving game state, if the first advantageous state is a bonus game state ART state or AT state, AT state or RT state if the first advantageous state is ART state],
The display means does not display moving images corresponding to music output by the sound output means in the second advantageous state [for example, FIGS. ~ same figure (o)],
The display means displays a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state [for example, FIG. 38(g) to FIG. ~ (k) in the same figure],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, in the first advantageous state, the game can be livened up by displaying moving images together with output of music, and in the second advantageous state, while the game is livened up by the output of music, for example, It is possible to prevent interfering with the variable performance for informing whether or not to win.

again,
"In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means is used to provide game information [e.g., the set value, the result of prefetching during the suspension of the jackpot game, and the jackpot again. It is possible to suggest that there is a reservation that becomes
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, by suggesting the game information when the predetermined condition is achieved, it is possible to increase the willingness to play to achieve the predetermined condition.

The game information may be information about a game that the player cannot usually know.

again,
"Equipped with operation means [eg, operation key unit 190],
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, FIG. j)], in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected using the operation means [for example, FIG. 39(h) etc. is displayed and selection is impossible],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, the music is made unselectable in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, so that the music is a special music (music suggesting information). It is possible to suggest that, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that display means may be provided, and the display means may be capable of displaying a music selection display representing music that can be selected by the player.

Further, the display means does not display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The display means may display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Further, the display means does not display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state,
The display means may display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can select the first music [for example, music 7 or Song 8] is added, and the first song can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first song cannot be selected in the normal game state [eg, non-time-saving game state]. There may be [eg FIG. 36].

In a part of the period [for example, the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained] in the first advantageous state [for example, the jackpot game state], it is a mode in which it is not possible to select a song using the operation means. may

Part of the period in the second advantageous state [for example, time-saving gaming state] [for example, during the period of super reach, the period when the special symbol is stopped, the period when the demo display is being performed, or the demo display Even during the period during which the menu display is being performed], the selection of music using the operation means may be disabled.

Alternatively, during a part of the normal game state [for example, non-time-saving game state], it may not be possible to select a song using the operation means.

Further, when a power failure occurs while a song is selected and then the power is restored, the preset initial song may be handled as the selected song.

In the following, additional notes will be given including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
It is possible to output music during special games (for example, jackpot games, etc.),
The number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is a predetermined number, but the number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a specific number.
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to Supplementary Note 1,
The specific number is a number less than the predetermined number,
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 3)
The game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
A predetermined number of songs can be output even during advantageous games (for example, time-saving games, etc.),
A video corresponding to the type of music being output is displayed during a special game, but a video corresponding to the type of music being output is not displayed during an advantageous game.
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The music output during the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied may suggest predetermined information related to the game.
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
During the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the player can select the music to be output using the operation means, but during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player outputs the music using the operation means. Unable to select songs
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 6)
The non-time-saving gaming state is
A game state in which a game ball should be shot toward the first game area (left area),
The time-saving game state is
A game state in which a game ball should be shot toward the second game area (right area),
If the first condition is satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
Regulating the execution of the first hitting method notification (left hitting notification) that notifies that the first game area should be fired in the first period after the shift from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state,
After the first period ends, perform the first hitting method notification over the third period,
A playground characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The game machine according to appendix 6,
If the second condition different from the first condition is established when shifting from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state,
Restricting the execution of the first hitting method notification in a second period shorter than the first period after shifting from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the end of the second period, the first playing method notification is executed over the third period.

(Appendix 8)
The game machine according to appendix 6 or 7,
If the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
After the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first hitting method notification may be performed over the third period,
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 8,
The first condition is to remember the first number of special reservations,
The second condition is to remember the second number of special reservations that is less than the first number,
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 6 to 9,
When moving from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state, execute the second hitting method notification (right-handed notification) to notify that the second game area should be fired,
In the final variation in the time-saving gaming state,
A third hitting method notification (hold and save notification) that is different from the second hitting method notification executed in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation and notifies that the second game area should be shot. while executing, displaying the number holds in the same manner as the number holds displayed in the changes prior to the final change;
A playground characterized by:

(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 6 to 10,
In the special game judgment based on the special in the non-time-saving gaming state, the special pattern (time-saving design) is not won, while in the special game judgment based on the special 2 (special figure 2 remaining hold) in the non-time-saving gaming state You may win a special pattern,
The game machine is characterized in that when the special symbol is won, the game machine shifts to a time-saving game state without going through the special game.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

42 to 62, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100) will be described in detail. 42 to 62 are in principle used only for explanations using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 62, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.
<Overall composition>
First, using FIG. 42, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. This figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is established, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a launcher. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the side of the player).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island facility, etc.) provided at a game machine installation office.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a vertically rectangular door member which has a locking function and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of the store (game parlor) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided to detect that the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be freely opened and closed. is a door member having an opening. The store clerk can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. is installed. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door. In the present embodiment, a lamp using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a locking function. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Also provided is a ball storage tray door sensor 1082 for detecting that the ball storage tray door 108 has been opened. The door 108 with a ball storage tray has a ball storage tray 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and has a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , a ball ejection button 130 for ejecting the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126 by the player's operation, and a game ball guided to the shooting device 110 by the player's operation on the game board. A ball shooting handle 134 that is shot into a game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices by the player's operation, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light. , and a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game parlor. Also, although not shown in FIG. 42, a return operation button for instructing the player's balance to be returned to the card unit is provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140 . Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and an enter button are arranged is also provided.

The shooting device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and has a shooting rod 146 that rotates when the ball shooting handle 134 is operated by the player, and a shooting mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the shooting rod 146. , provided. While the ball shooting handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, the shooting device 110 shoots the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined shooting period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of launching means.

FIG. 43 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 42 as seen from the back side.

A ball tank 150, which has an upwardly-opening opening in the upper back of the pachinko machine 100 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, which is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have flowed down into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152.例文帳に追加In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that imparts driving force to game balls and conveys the game balls.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 45). A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the granting condition, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the granting condition is imparted (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 housing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 45) that controls the game in general, and processing information generated by the main control section 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 160 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to the effect based on A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to performance, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls ( (see FIG. 45), and a payout board case 172 housing a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by the operation of a game clerk; ), a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 45) that supplies power to various electric game machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of the game clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. An interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192 , a setting change button 194 and a character ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main substrate 156 . In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set in a setting change mode. can move to In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while confirming this. It should be noted that even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The character item ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 421(A), the character ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged vertically, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED is modularized on the right side. , the character ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the character ratio (YH) and the continuous character ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The character ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red single-color LED, but it may be one capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least part of the role product ratio/setting display device 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162 . Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 44(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right when viewed from the front. An arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the upper side, and the lower side may be referred to as the lower side. Although not shown in FIG. 44, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side facing the player may be called the front side or the front side, and the back side may be called the rear side. Or it may be called the back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on its front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104 . The game area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104 .

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. is the center of rotation, the right side 200b of the game board 200 in the front view is pressed against the main body 104 and set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. Sometimes.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a game board 201 serving as a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of, for example, resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 201 . When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, it is possible to carry out error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop to disable the continuation of the game, etc.). The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104 . The area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 in the game area 124 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the shot game ball.

An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be called a non-game area. The play area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the shooting intensity of the game ball is maximized can be called a game area 124 . The game area 124 may include an area through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like in the game area 124 . The game area 124 may be called a flowing area in that the game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be called a non-flowing area in that the game balls do not flow down during the game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a flowing area, but an area where game balls do not flow due to the presence of a production device or the like may be called a non-flowing area.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 124 . The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). The decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display regions: a left pattern display region 208a, a middle pattern display region 208b, a right pattern display region 208c and an effect display region 208d. The and right design display areas 208c display different decorative designs, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effects. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. FIG. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, a liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124 .

FIG. 44(b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), on the main control lamp board 254, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol reservation lamp 216. , a special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, a special pattern 2 holding lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp RK, an electric sapo middle lamp RD, a right hand lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR. In addition, hereinafter, the normal pattern may be referred to as "general pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as "special pattern".

The normal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal map, and in this embodiment, it is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, each consists of two upper and lower stages and a total of eight LEDs.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are reserved, and in this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation game is held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). making it possible to The special figure 1 pending lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to hold the special figure fluctuation games up to a predetermined number (for example, four). and In addition, the special figure 2 suspension lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games, and in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). is possible.

Further, the high-probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the game state is a high-probability state in which a big win is likely to occur, or that the game state will be in a high-probability state. The electric sapot middle lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shortened and that the electric tulip (electric chew) blade member 2311 to be described later is in the electric sapot state where it is easy to open for a long time. . The right-handed display lamp RM is a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, and an electric support state, and is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state in which he/she can benefit from right-handed hitting. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

A game board 200 shown in FIG. 44(a) is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where game balls can roll. The warp device 242 discharges game balls that have entered a warp entrance 242a provided on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to a stage 244 from a warp exit 242b. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is a stage on which the game ball exiting the warp device 242 exhibits reciprocating motion, rotating motion, and the like. In this stage 244, the residence time of the game ball becomes longer as the game ball reciprocates and rotates.

Also, the first effect movable body 7 is arranged above the game area 124 while being supported by the main body 104 . The first effect movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light-emitting portion 71 in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes capable of emitting full-color light are arranged. Furthermore, on the right side of the game area 124, a second effect movable body 8 imitating a person's right arm is arranged. The second effect movable body 8 is composed of an upper arm 81 and a forearm 82. An upper arm motor (not shown) rotates the upper arm to the shoulder position and a forearm (not shown) rotates the forearm to the elbow position. A motor and a finger motor (not shown) for bending and extending five fingers are provided. The second effect movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 as a movable area by an upper arm motor and a forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 44( a ), part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative upper cover 203 . In addition, the upper right portion of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205, and at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205, a normal figure start opening 228 is arranged. The normal figure starting port 228 is configured with a device for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, called a gate or through chucker, and is located on the right side of the game board 200 in this embodiment. One is placed in the The ball that has passed through the normal figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, but when it enters, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out, and the entered game ball is released. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 , the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal pattern fluctuation game by the normal pattern display device 210 .

In addition, in this embodiment, one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the central lower part of the game board 200 . A star-shaped effect lamp 206 is arranged directly under the first special figure starting port 230 . Furthermore, a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 is arranged on the left side of the first special figure starting port 230 . When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. Along with discharging to the plate 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. A ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In addition, in this embodiment, the attacker unit 23 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 124, and this attacker unit 23 is also provided with an electric chew type first special figure start port separately. Hereinafter, the first special figure starting port 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is referred to as the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the first special figure starting of the electric chew type separately provided in the attacker unit 23 The mouth may be called the first special figure start mouth (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in an advanced state and is in a difficult winning state, and in a retracted state becomes an easy winning state. In the following description, the advanced state of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as closed, and the retreated state may be referred to as open. Further, the attacker unit 23 is also provided with light-emitting diodes (not shown) capable of emitting full-color light.

The attacker unit 23 is also provided with a second special figure starter opening 232 , a first variable winning opening 234 , and a second variable winning opening 235 in addition to the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231 . These variable winning openings may be called "attackers". A first door member 2341 of the first variable winning port (attacker) 234 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in an advanced state, and is in a difficult-to-win state, and in a retreated state to an easy-to-win state. In the following description, the advanced state of the first door member 2341 may be referred to as closed, and the retracted state may be referred to as open. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port (attacker) 235 also advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, when it is advanced, it forms a ball passage and is in an easy-to-win state, and retreats. In this state, it becomes difficult to win a prize. In the following description, the extension of the second door member 2351 may be referred to as opening, and the retraction may be referred to as closing.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center part has a configuration in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter when hitting to the right due to its arrangement. . On the other hand, in the central part of the stage 244 described above, there is a special route 244a that makes it easier for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200. is provided. In addition, even if it does not pass through the stage 244, the 1st special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 can also be aimed at from the left side. Therefore, the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting opening that can be expected to enter by hitting left.

Furthermore, although not shown, the game area 124 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings. When the ball enters the general winning slot, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the ball has entered the general winning slot, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls. It is discharged to the ball storage dish 126 . Balls that enter the general winning slot are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, the game area 124 is provided with a disk-shaped ball hitting direction changing member 236 called a windmill, and a plurality of game nails. An out port 240 is provided for discharging the balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with the intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and releases the firing rod. And the shot mallet passes through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124.例文帳に追加Then, the ball that reaches the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail, etc., and enters various prize winning openings and starting openings. The player reaches the out port 240 without winning the starting port or only passing through the normal pattern starting port 228.例文帳に追加Further, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed in the lower side of the space portion 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout for detecting passage of a game ball received in the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104 . Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have won various winning ports) are received in this discharged ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. It should be noted that this figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted. , a payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling the launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. there is

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the main control section 300 as a whole. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit contains two counters) is equipped with Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302. FIG.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and a ball storage tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 and A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general figure display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example , General Figure Reservation Lamp 216, Special Figure 1 Reservation Lamp 218, Special Figure 2 Reservation Lamp 220, High Accuracy Medium Lamp RK, Electric Sapo Medium Lamp RD, Right Strike Lamp RM, Round Display Lamp RR, etc.) for display control drive circuit 330, a predetermined movable member, for example, a driving means for driving the blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 as a normal electric accessory, and a first variable prize as a special electric accessory A driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including driving means for driving the first door member 2341 of the opening 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318 .

When the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start ports 230 and 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. output to The random value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, 231, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special figure 1. stored in the register for Also, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing Latch and store the latched value in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to Special Figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the device.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply. is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main control section main processing, which will be described later, is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the Communication with 1 sub control unit 400 and payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. is doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. good too.

Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main controller 300 . The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Also, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402 . The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp driving circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp driving circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452 . Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 . The game board lamp 442 includes the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light-emitting portion 71 provided on the first movable effect body 7, the light-emitting diode (not shown) disposed on the attacker unit 23, and the like. there is In addition, the game frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, and a button lamp 138 for causing the production button 136 to emit light.

In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a first effect movable body 7 on the upper side shown in FIG. A drive circuit 422 for driving and controlling motors of various production devices such as the production movable body 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of various production devices, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect depression of various buttons that constitute the production buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to 402 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Based on the signal from the CPU 504, the VDP ( video display processor) 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is also connected to a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, image display data, and the like. In this embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of retaining the storage state even when the power is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display regarding the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM in which stored information volatilizes when power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and provides prize balls or ball rental based on control signals output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface unit 606 . In addition, the payout control unit 600 provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600 . The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. These sensors detect when 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300 .

The shooting control unit 630 outputs a control signal that instructs the permission or stop of shooting, which is output by the payout control unit 600, and the operation of the ball shooting handle 134 by the player, which is output by a shooting intensity output circuit provided in the ball shooting handle 134. A firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 is controlled, and a ball feeder 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage tray 126 to the firing device 110 is controlled based on a control signal that indicates the firing intensity corresponding to the amount. control.

The power control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152 etc. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500 Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 46(a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. I will explain the types of Toku-zu and Universal-zu.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on the condition that the first starting opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting openings 230 and 231, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting opening 232. A special figure 2 variation game is started on the condition that the second start opening sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, has detected that the has entered. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks some lamps of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) "Special figure 1 Variation display” (special figure variation game) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks some lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) of the eight lamps. 2 variation display” (special figure variation game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop pattern mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time decided before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 , the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "special figure 1 or 2 variable display" to the stop display of the special figure 1 or 2 stop design mode may be referred to as special figure variable display. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in succession.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether one of the special figures 1 and 2 is performing the variable display of the other special figure, the specification to start the variable display of the special figure (such A pachinko machine with such specifications is sometimes called a "simultaneous variation machine".)

FIG. 46(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. In this FIG. 46(a), four kinds of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown. In FIG. 46(a), the outline parts in the figure indicate lamps that are turned off, and the black parts indicate lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” and “special figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 . ``Special figure A'' is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot pattern, and when ``special figure A'' is stop-displayed, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize winning port 234 is opened, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, the "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big winning pattern, and when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, it shifts to a big winning game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and after the big winning game ends, control is performed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot patterns may be prepared. Also, in some rounds, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win (for example, it is difficult to win due to short opening) may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, determination of whether or not there is a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether to make a normal big win or a probability variable big win is made by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special variable game is high (variable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state with a high probability of winning this jackpot is called a special high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is a special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special low probability state and the special high probability state, and the special low probability state and the special high probability state Variation of special figures The times are configured to be very different. In addition, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where it shifts to a time saving state (electrical support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state, such as by shortening the time from the end of the jackpot in the special variable game to the start of the next jackpot. refers to the state. The time saving will be described later in detail, but the time saving state is called the normal high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "normal high probability change"), and the state that is not in the time saving state is called the normal low probability state. Thus, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on the condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric sapo state" is the state related to the general map, and the "time saving state" is the state related to the special map or the state related to the general map and the special map. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to ON, it is an electric sapo state and a normal pattern high probability state. In the general pattern high probability state, it becomes easier to win the general pattern variation game than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the general pattern fluctuation game is 0/100 (that is, always lost) in the general pattern low probability state (non-electrical sapo state), whereas the general pattern high probability state (electrical sapo state ) rises to 100/100 (ie, always wins). In addition, in the electric sapo state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-electric sapo state (normal figure variable short). For example, in the non-electrical support state, the variation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Also, in the electric sapo state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer than in the non-electric sapo state (electric chew open period extension). For example, the electric chew open period of 0.5 seconds in the non-electrical support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the electric sapo state, the blade members 2311 are more likely to open than in the non-electric sapo state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened). For example, the blade member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric sapo state per winning to the normal figure start port 228, opens twice in the electric sapo state (open for 2 seconds, close for 1 second, close again for 2 seconds open). The probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases due to the extension of the electric chew open period and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. In addition, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. Especially in a jackpot game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls entering the first variable prize winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 decreases, the player will not be able to win. This is because there may be disadvantages. In addition, in this embodiment, in the electric sapo state (time saving state), all of the normal map fixed change, the normal map variable short, the electric chew open period extension, and the electric chew open number increase are performed, but at least of these If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage becomes high, and an electric support state (time saving state) may be established. Alternatively, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases, and if either one of the extension of the electric chew open period or the increase in the number of electric chew open times is performed, as an electric support state (time saving state) good too. In the non-electric sapo state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 than in the electric sapo state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which game balls are easy to enter. This special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is in an easy-to-win state for a long period of time in the electric sapo state than in the non-electric sapo state. In this embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, after the end of the jackpot game performed after that, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 50 times, and in the 51st time, the Move to the support state (low-probability normal state). On the other hand, when winning the jackpot without electric support ("special figure B"), the state is not shifted to the electric support state after the jackpot game ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. Further, when the "special figure B" is stop-displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big-hit design, a small-hit design ("special design C") is also prepared for the special-figure 1. FIG. When the "special figure C" hits a small hit, the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens 12 times for 0.06 seconds after the symbols stop. The open time and the number of times the second door member 2351 is opened can be appropriately set. In the small-hit game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second variable winning hole 235, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is obtained, a small-hit game is executed. is completed, and the second door member 2351 is not opened thereafter. During the small hit game, it shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. A small win is a win whose control state does not change before and after the small win game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small win game after the end of the small win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, since it is a simultaneous variation machine, when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit and shifts to a small winning game, the situation where the special figure 2 is being displayed in a variable display can occur. . In this case, when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit, the variable display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small winning game related to the small win ends, the variable display of the special figure 2 is resumed. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big win game, the special figure 2 is displayed in a variable display, and when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big win game, the special figure 1 is variablely displayed. A certain situation can occur in the middle, but in this case, if one of the special symbols becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the wrong result is displayed. It will happen.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure D" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 46(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. FIG. In this FIG. 46(b), five kinds of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three kinds of special figures among them are big hit symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure e"). Figure c”). The "special figure a" is a 6R normal big win pattern, and when the "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning port 234 is opened, and after the big win game ends, the control state is reached. becomes a special low probability normal high probability state. In addition, the "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable big win pattern, and when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and after the big win game ends, control is performed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. The "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big win pattern, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, it shifts to a big win game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and after the big win game ends, The control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In some rounds, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win (for example, it is difficult to win due to a short opening) may be prepared. Also, in the special figure 2, three types of jackpot patterns are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot patterns may be prepared.

Also, in the special figure 2, a small winning figure ("special figure d") is prepared in addition to the big winning figure. In the case of a small hit with "special figure d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable prize winning opening 235 opens only once for 0.06 seconds after the symbols stop. Here, when compared with the small hit pattern of special figure 1 ("special figure C"), the small hit with special figure 1 ("special figure d" is stopped) In the case where FIG. C" is stopped display), more game balls can easily enter the second variable winning hole 235, and more balls can be obtained. In other words, it becomes a game property that a ball is not given in the small hit of the special figure 2 and a ball is given in the small hit of the special figure 1. - 特許庁The open time and the number of times the second door member 2351 is opened can be appropriately set.

Furthermore, even in the special figure 2, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 46(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 kinds of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". Special figure 1 starting opening (fixed) 230, special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 or special figure 2 starting opening 232, that is, special figure 1 starting opening (fixed) 230 or special figure 1 starting opening (Variable) On the condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered 231, or that the second starting opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 , "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → . . . "Decorative pattern variable display" may be performed to switch the display in the order of "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→. That is, the decorative design display device 208 variably displays the decorative design separately from the first special design display device 212 and the second special design display device 214 . Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state and the electric sapo state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed variably, the decorative symbols are variably displayed according to the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly In the probability variation state where the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed according to the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the special figure 2 is changed, the decorative pattern is not changed. is performed, and in the probability variation state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative design is not performed, and the design variation display is performed only in the 4th design and the 1st special figure display device 212.

Modes other than the case of confirming the 6R probability variation big hit with the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case of confirming the 10R probability variation big hit with the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state When a big hit or a small win is announced in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, three decorative patterns with the same number other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are displayed. A combination of decorative patterns arranged side by side (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the 6R probability variation jackpot ("special figure B") is confirmed and notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state 10R probability variation jackpot (" In the case of confirming that it is a special figure c”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” are stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the "special figure D" or "special figure e" of the missing pattern, the pattern display areas 208a to 208c display a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described so far (for example, a random eyes) to stop displaying.

Hereinafter, in the decorative design display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative design variable display" to the stop display of the decorative design stop design mode will be referred to as the decorative design variable display ("decorative design variable display"). There is also.) The variable display of decorative patterns is controlled by the second sub-controller 500 .

FIG. 46(d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes of the normal pattern: "normal pattern A", which is a winning pattern, and "normal pattern B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the normal map display device 210 alternately lights the two LEDs arranged vertically. Variation display” (normal figure variation game) is performed. Then, after the fluctuation time has passed, either one of the winning pattern "normal pattern A" and the losing pattern "normal pattern B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 46(d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variable display of the normal pattern" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal pattern may be referred to as the variable display of the normal pattern.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round determination random number, a special figure electric sapo decision random number, a special figure design random number, and the like. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 stores the reserved number of special figures, special figure winning random numbers, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area that stores the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure that is divided into the maximum number (in this example, four) areas that can hold the start of the success/failure determination (lottery), A random number storage area for normal maps is also provided. As will be described later, a plurality of types of starting information are stored as one set in the starting information storage unit for special figures, and each set of these starting information is stored in order of winning (reservation order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value setting (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask setting, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the WDT 314 and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 detects the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 is supplying to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it monitors whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (if the CPU 304 detects that the power has been cut off), the process returns to step S103, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 has not detected that the power has been cut off), step Proceed to S107. Even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, The output port to the first sub-controller 400) outputs a clear signal, the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps in order to execute the initialization process.

If it is determined not to return to the state before the power interruption (step S109; No), is the reason for this being that the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is turned ON (step S115). If it is determined that there is (step S115; Yes), setting change processing is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor in the role product ratio/setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments of the setting monitor are incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor indicate "6". When it is set, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities can be selected. is determined. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194 . In the present embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the character ratio/setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Also, in the present embodiment, six levels of settings 1 to 6 are set, but settings other than six levels may be used, and settings may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is held and the held setting value is displayed. good too.

If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is turned ON ( Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is executed to initialize the basic circuit 302 (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes initialization processing to initialize the pachinko machine 100 . In this initialization processing, interrupt inhibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Note that in the present embodiment, the setting values set in the setting change process (step S117) are held even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, the normal return command and the setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. This return-to-normal command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the general pattern winning random number counter and the special pattern random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of step S121 except while the timer interrupt processing that starts at predetermined intervals is being performed.

On the other hand, in step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out, and the stack pointer is reset (permanent setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and after resetting to each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 in step S233 in timer interrupt processing of the main controller 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment). A partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320 . Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected by the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) before the last time is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308 and stored in the two previous detection signal storage areas provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. memorize to Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each of the ball detection sensors stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control section timer interrupt processing, which repeats activation at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the two-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball begins to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is this time detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that a prize has been won when a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal the previous time, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is converted into predetermined prize winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal from the time before last, presence of the previous detection signal, and presence of the current detection signal). information indicating that it is), general winning mouth, first variable winning mouth 234, second variable winning mouth 235, first special figure start opening (fixed) 230, first special figure start opening (variable ) 231, and the second special figure start opening 232, or the passage of the normal figure start opening 228 is determined. That is, it is determined that the ball has entered the general winning openings, these variable winning openings 234 and 235, and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 matches the above-described winning judgment pattern information, It is determined that there is a prize in the 1 special figure start port (fixed) 230, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area is detected, and the subsequent processing associated with the prize to the 1st special figure start port (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, without performing the processing associated with winning the subsequent first special figure start port (fixed) 230 Branch to subsequent processing. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal the time before last, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a winning, it is not determined that there has been a winning until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches with the pattern information, then it is determined whether or not it matches with the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update process and basic random number update process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated, and then used by the main control unit 300, the normal figure winning random value and Update the random number counter for generating each special random number. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the general pattern winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general pattern winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. After that, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. As a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and stored in the memory area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for general pattern winning that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308. If the value is equal to the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for normal figure winning, and In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random numbers has made the next round. Keep In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for normal figure winning random number generation has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one round The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal pattern display pattern update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the display of the pattern on the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, and the second special pattern display device 214. Various types of timers, such as a special display pattern update timer for timing the time of fluctuation / stop display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning of winning openings 234, 235 or starting openings 230, 231, 232, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original number-of-balls-storage area.

Also, in step S217, a prize acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired. A plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 .

In step S219 executed subsequent to step S217, payout request number transmission processing is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. , power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bit 4-5 is the current processing type (0-3) for encryption, and bit 0-3 is encryption. It shows the number of payout requests after the processing.

In step S221, a general pattern state update process is performed. This general pattern state update process performs one process out of a plurality of processes corresponding to the general pattern state. For example, in the middle of the normal pattern fluctuation display (the value of the normal pattern display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), in the normal pattern state update process, the two LEDs that constitute the normal pattern display device 210 are alternately lit and extinguished. Drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a normal pattern variation display (normal pattern variation game).

In addition, in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the general pattern fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the general pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the pattern The two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. It controls the lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general pattern state update process. Here, along with performing the lighting/extinguishing drive control described above, a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal map stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 46(d)) and the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 46(d)). display. Furthermore, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the normal chart stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the fixedly displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal pattern variation game.

Also, if the result of the normal pattern variation game is hit, as described later, the normal pattern per flag is turned on. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the normal pattern operation in the setting area, for a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), the solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 2311 of the first special pattern start port (variable) 231 (various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 45 ), a signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 .

In addition, in the general pattern state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 500 ms), the attacker unit A signal to hold the blade member 2311 in the closed state to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 45) for opening and closing the blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 provided in 23 Along with outputting, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 .

In addition, in the normal chart state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the timer for blade closing time management changes from 1 to 0), the normal chart non-operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, as will be described later, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on. When this general pattern loss flag is on, even in the general pattern state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period has ended (the value of the general pattern stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal chart non-operation is set. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, normal figure related lottery processing is performed. In this general pattern related lottery process, the normal pattern fluctuation game and the opening and closing control of the first special pattern start port (variable) 231 are not performed (normal pattern state is not in operation), and the reserved normal pattern When the number of variable games is 1 or more, the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is won or not by random number lottery based on the normal pattern winning random value stored in the random value storage area. A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If the prize is not won, the winning flag is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is displayed from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variable display of a figure, and this variable display time is stored in a normal figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a normal figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game is stored in the normal pattern reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time the hit determination is performed, the number of the reserved normal pattern fluctuation game is changed. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this normal pattern pending number storage area. Also, the random number used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased starting information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and determines in advance the stop pattern and the fluctuation time before the propriety determination process, and the preliminary determination The result (special figure lookahead result) is stored in the lookahead result storage unit in RAM308.

Then, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure status update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update processing, according to the state of special figure 2, one of the following processes is performed.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the predetermined out of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 It performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats lighting and extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variation display (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of times of shortening of working hours stored in the number of times of shortening of hours stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of shortening of hours of working hours.

Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a special pattern probability change flag, and a normal pattern probability change flag. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop design in the special figure 2 related lottery process to be described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer becomes 0 from 1), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, special figure If the probability fluctuation flag is also ON, and the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, the special pattern c shown in FIG. If special figure b, 6R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on special figure a, small hit flag is on special figure d, loss When the flag is on, so that each aspect of the special figure e is performed, the LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to light and extinguish, and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings that represent By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 includes 10R probability variation jackpot design (special figure e), 6R probability variation jackpot design (special figure b), 6R normal jackpot design (special figure a), small hit design (special figure Fig. d) and one of the lost symbols (special symbol e) is confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, but the special figure 2 variation display time has elapsed When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of the special map 1, at the timing of the jackpot pattern display of the special map 2, the lottery result of the special map 1 is discarded and the lost pattern is stopped and displayed. It will be done. Also, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, when the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variation display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 The progress of the variable display time of special figure 1 will be interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display, and as a result, from the start of the variable display of special figure 1 until the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small winning pattern of the special figure 2 to the end of the small winning game.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (eg 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM308. By this setting, the special figure 2 fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variation game is notified to the player. Moreover, if the number of times of shortening of working hours stored in the number of times of shortening of working hours storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the shortening of working hours flag is turned on, the shortening of working hours flag is turned off. Furthermore, during the jackpot game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is, after additionally storing in the RAM308 as information to be included in the command data described later, the process is terminated.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, a big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning presentation period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208.例文帳に追加Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for this purpose. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the winning effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning port 234). A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state (backward state) is output to a part of the various solenoids 332), and information indicating the open period is stored in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. set. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal to hold the first door member 2341 in the closed state (advance state) is output to the opening/closing solenoid of the first door member 2341 of the first variable prize winning port 234 (a part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 45). At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 . Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the big winning opening closing setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this exemplary embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in order to set the waiting period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the decorative pattern display device 208 will end the big hit, the effect waiting time is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period. Also, if the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of times of time saving (for example, 50 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in RAM 308, and provided in RAM 308 turn on the short working hours flag. In addition, if the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of times of working hours is not set to the number of times of working hours storage, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Also, if the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player by shortening the time from the end of the big win in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big win. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern probability change). In the general pattern high probability state, the probability of hitting in the general pattern variation game is higher than in the general pattern low probability state. In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter than in the general pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the general pattern high probability state, compared to the general pattern low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, in the general pattern high probability state, compared to the general pattern low probability state, the blade member 2311 tends to open more. The state in which any of these normal map fixed variable, normal map variable short, and electric chu opening is set is called the electric sapo (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Also, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This is a special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game when the normal pattern high probability state is reached during the jackpot game. There is a problem that many game balls enter the game, and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the big win (the number of balls released) increases, increasing gambling. is. In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls released during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so the big hit The time saving flag may remain on even during the game.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for production standby time management becomes 0 from 1), the special figure 2 non-operation in the setting area of RAM308 set medium.

As mentioned above, although the example of the big hit game using the 1st variable winning a prize mouth 234 was demonstrated, the small hitting game using the 2nd variable winning a prize mouth 235 is also the same.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer becomes 1 to 0), Set special figure 2 non-operating in the setting area of RAM308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update processing) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, according to the special figure 1 state, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process described above is performed. Each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process of replacing "special figure 2" with "special figure 1" in the content described in the above special figure 2 state update process, so the description is omitted. In addition, the order of special figure 2 state update processing and special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 ends, this time, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 2 variation game is not performed, the special figure 2 state is inactive, and neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the jackpot game. And using the earliest special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of reserved special figure 2 fluctuation games is 1 or more is executed. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special figure 1 variation game is not performed, the special figure 1 state is inactive, neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the jackpot game, and it is suspended. Executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random number storage area as a starting condition that the number of special figure 1 fluctuation games is 1 or more . That is, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variation game regardless of whether the special figure 2 is in the variation game, and the special figure 2 is the special figure 1 during the variation game Regardless of whether there is, it is configured to be able to start the variation game (simultaneous variation machine).

The notification of the result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the variable probability state, the winning to the special figure 2 start port 232 The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231, and the normal game state And in the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 is the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 This will take precedence over the announcement of the results of the lottery. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probability variable state becomes a big hit, in parallel with the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start port 232, or once the special figure 2 is started The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 is executed. may occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state becomes a big hit, the lottery based on the winning prize to the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 In parallel with the notification of the lottery results, or the notification of the lottery results of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230, special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231 is interrupted to start the special figure 2 A lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the mouth 232 may be notified.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 starting information (special 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 ROM 306 Using the success/failure determination table stored in , it is determined (hit/failure determination) whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is made. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the decided propriety determination result of the special figure 2 The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display are determined. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of the success/failure determination, the acquired special figure fluctuation time determination random number, etc., was stored in the ROM 306 Determine the variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 using various tables.

The main control unit 300, after retrieving the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and special 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 reservation number of the FIG. 2 reservation number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the above-mentioned special figure status update processing and special figure related lottery processing are performed independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures are configured to vary at the same time. However, depending on the state of one of the special symbols, the lottery process and the variation game regarding the holding of the other special symbol may not be performed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are to be varied simultaneously, the decorative pattern display device 208 is made to perform an effect display that matches the variation display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probability variation state, the decorative pattern display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, regarding the variable display of the special figure 1 A decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special symbols, or a plurality of decorative pattern display devices for displaying the lottery results of the respective special symbols, although the effect display is not performed. may be provided to display each lottery result separately. In addition, when the variation regarding a plurality of special symbols is performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special symbol that stops the variation later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits. Command type (in this example form, basic command, winning mouth winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2 A command to be sent at the start of the fluctuation, a command to specify which one of the special figures 1 and 2 is stopped first), per special figure start command, special figure per end command, large winning mouth open Command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, setting command, etc. Information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc., and further this implementation In the form, when the special figure fluctuation start command is set, the stop design information that can specify the stop design is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, it includes the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, it contains the number of big hit rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 start opening (fixed) 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 start opening (variable) 231, special figure 2 start It includes the presence or absence of winning to the mouth 232, the presence or absence of winning to the first variable winning mouth 234, the presence or absence of winning to the second variable winning mouth 235, and the like. In the case of the lookahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the type of special figures 1 and 2, the number of lookaheads stored in the number of lookahead storage area, and the stop pattern stored in the lookahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information.

In addition, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the command data, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related lottery process selected by Set information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Effect control information, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period stored in the RAM 308 in the command data Effect control information, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game is set. In the above-described big winning opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games or special figure 2 fluctuation games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data, notice information (advance notice information, false advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the ball storage tray full error. do. When a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error is detected, a device indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400 Set information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special figure start port (variable) 231, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, and drive circuits 324, 326, 330 The display data to be output to the general figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various state display units 328, etc., is set to the output port of I / O310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310. FIG.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt ending process is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. return to On the other hand, in step S243, when power is restored, a specific variable and stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. after that, it enters the HALT state.

Next, the general figure related lottery process (step S223) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 49(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal figure propriety determination table, and FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 1/2 propriety determination table. There is, and FIG. 49(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure determination distribution table.

The general pattern suitability determination table shown in FIG. 49( a ) is a general pattern suitability determination table used at the time of general pattern suitability determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when this success/failure determination table is used, there is no hit value in the normal low probability state, that is, the probability of winning is 0%. In the high-probability state, the range of possible random numbers is 0-65535, and the winning value is 0-65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (ie, 100%). In addition, in the normal pattern low probability state (when short time operation is not activated), it may be possible to hit with a certain probability (for example, 1%), or in the normal pattern high probability state (when short time operation), a certain (eg, 1%).

The special figure 1/2 propriety determination table shown in FIG. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately 1/199) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately 1/192) as a result of the success/fail determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately 1/180) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the big hit lottery of the special figures 1 and 2.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately 1/174) as a result of the success/fail determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately 1/145) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the big hit lottery of the special figures 1 and 2.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, A big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately 1/93) as a result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery.

Also, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether it is a special high probability state or a special low probability state, 6580 / 65536 A small hit of opening and closing 12 times is selected with a probability (about 1/10), and a small hit of opening and closing once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special figure 1. be done. It should be noted that a small hit may not occur in the special figure 1, and a small win only in the special figure 2 (a small win of opening 12 times and a small win of opening and closing once) may occur. Also, the probability of a small hit may be changed for each setting.

Thus, in this embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special low probability state, but it is almost the same probability. It's set to run. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit differs depending on the setting. The higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big hit, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win a big hit. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the less likely it is to become a big hit, but when shifting to the variable probability state, the number of occurrences of small wins tends to increase compared to the high setting, and different game characteristics can be provided in some cases.

In this embodiment, in any setting, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state, but the big difference is the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 be done. In this embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is, for example, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds is selected. In the special figure high probability state, when hitting to the right, a large number of game balls are likely to enter the second special figure start port 232, and it is possible to perform a large number of variable display of the special figure 2, as a result , It is designed to increase the frequency of small hits. In this embodiment, since it can be said that the frequency of occurrence of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in the state where there are four (full) pattern variation displays of the special figure 2 that are being held, one time of the special figure 1 is longer than the time it takes to digest all the symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 Since it takes a longer time to digest the symbol variation display, it is difficult for the special figure 1 to generate a big hit. On the other hand, the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the variation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit to the right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the small hit probability will not change, but the time until the result of the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed is about Since it is every 10 minutes, even if the player hits to the right, it is substantially disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in the special figure low probability state, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 580 seconds in the case of losing and small hits, but the variation time in the case of a big hit is shorter than that, for example, It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 49(c) shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and determines a stop symbol based on the determination result of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. This special figure determination distribution table defines a random number range corresponding to the special figure stop design mode (see FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b)) for each success/failure determination result.

First, if the result of special figure 1 success/failure determination is a big hit, one of "special figure A" and "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "special figure A" is the 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "special figure B" is the 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Moreover, if the result of the special figure 1 propriety determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As described above, the "special figure C" is a small win in which the second variable winning opening 235 repeats short openings up to 12 times.

Next, if the result of special figure 2 success/failure determination is a big hit, one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "special figure a" is the 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, "special figure b" is the 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and " Special figure c" is a 10R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 60/100 for "special figure a", 5/100 for "special figure b", and 35/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 propriety determination is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As described above, "special figure d" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 is opened once for a short period of time.

Next, processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. First, in step S301 of FIG. 50(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 300 .

In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform processing to change to

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command for the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416 .

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the performance data read out in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the button lamp 138 that causes the production button 136 to emit light, the star-shaped production lamp 206, the light emitting part 71 provided in the first production movable body 7, and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23 Light emission control is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read out in step S309 includes a command to the upper first rendering movable body 7 or the second rendering movable body 8 arranged on the right side shown in FIG. This command is output to the drive circuit 422 .

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 50(b) is a flowchart of the first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal from the main controller 300 . In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

FIG. 50(c) is a flow chart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S341 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main process, and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, transmission of the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission processing (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing, and other processing for updating the random value for effect etc.

Next, processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described. FIG. 51(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. First, in step S401 of FIG. 51(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, the effect data corresponding to this command (the effect data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the effect data displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207) is stored in the ROM ( (not shown)), and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 51(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-controller 400 . In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-controller 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 51(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM explained in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

FIG. 51(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-controller main processing. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers 1 and 2 of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 . Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, specific configurations of the character item ratio/setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 52(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the character ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 52(B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. is.

As described above, the character ratio/setting display 196 includes a character ratio monitor and a setting monitor. The character ratio monitor displays the continuous character ratio (RY) and the character ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current set value.

Here, the continuous role ratio refers to the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired, which is due to the operation of the role when the role is operated continuously (i.e., the first It means the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning with the variable winning opening 234 open. In addition, the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the first variable winning hole 234 to the number of out balls may be used. In addition, the role ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the role (that is, the first special figure start port (variable) 231, the first variable winning port 234 and the second 2) refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning with the variable winning port 235 open. In addition, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special starting opening (fixed) 230, the first special starting opening (variable) 231, the second special opening opening 232 for the number of out balls And it may be a ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning a prize in a general winning hole.

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous role product ratio, when it is determined that the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous role product ratio is displayed blinking, and then to output a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous role product ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 . In addition, it may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156 . As a result, the model application test for the game machine may be smoothly performed.

Also, as a result of calculating the role ratio, if it is determined that the ratio is over 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the role ratio is displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ). Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the role product ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 .

In the present embodiment, when the continuous role product ratio or the role product ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED blinks. good too.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the DIP switch board 198 is provided with eight DIP switches. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each DIP switch can be read to change the appearance probability of the effect. Appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc. can be set.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning hole 235 is not opened in the big winning game, but is opened only in the small winning game. may For example, as the special figure 2 jackpot, a 3R jackpot (substantially a 1R jackpot), a 6R jackpot, or the like, which is opened by the second variable winning port 235 rather than the first variable winning port 234, may be prepared. .

Moreover, although the small hit was prepared for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit may be provided only for the special figure 2. - 特許庁That is, only in the special figure 2, the second variable winning opening 235 may provide a small hit that repeats short opening a maximum of a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and a small hit that only opens once. . By doing this, in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 does not become a winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning port 234 is in a difficult winning state, If the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 is also in a difficult winning state, most of the game balls hit to the right enter the 2nd special figure start opening 232, and win a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of the small winning game is higher than the winning probability of the big winning game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 can be set up to a certain number of times (for example, 12 times). It is easy to win a small win that repeats short opening, and it can be expected that this small winning game will earn more balls.

Next, a specific example of an effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The decorative design display device 208 is shown in FIG. In addition, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218, the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration. (same up to the example shown in FIG. 60).

FIG. 53 also shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206 which is one of the game board lamps 442 .

Further, on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Note that the background here is white with no pattern, but a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is white with no pattern, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed on the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed in accordance with the ornamental symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the pattern is changing (or design is stopped) and notifying the number of reservations. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, in the upper right of the display area, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 1 is provided, and in the lower right, the notification area during design fluctuation of special figure 2 is provided. In addition, the notification area during the design fluctuation of the general pattern and the pending number display area of the general pattern may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched to the reserved number indicated by special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is special figure 2 reserved lamp 220 is consistent with the number of holds indicated by In addition, in the special figure 1 pattern fluctuation notification area, while the special figure 1 pattern is stopped, according to the result, for example, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed with "○", If it is a small hit, it will be stopped and displayed with "△". , and if it is not correct, it is stopped with "x". Also, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is in progress. In addition, the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the display area during the design fluctuation of the special figure 1, and this is the display mode corresponding to the symbol variation display and the stop display of the special figure 2 changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the 4th pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, a preview notice or a notice regarding the pattern fluctuation display during execution you can go The fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the center lower part of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 53 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 60). In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 in the normal game state, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a reserved icon representing the reservation of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations of special figure 1 is also represented by the number of reserved icons of special figure 1, in addition to the number of lights of special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservations of special figure 1 display area, The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservations display area of special figure 2. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of the pending|holding icons of special figure 2. FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the starting information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. FIG. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest starting information (oldest winning) may be called the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest starting information may be called the second pending icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserved icon on the right side becomes the reserved icon with the older winning prize.

In FIG. 53(a), two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special-figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and these two special-figure 1 pending icons h11 and h12 are both , is displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a display mode of the pending icon displayed on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. All of the pending icons shown in FIG. 54 are circular, but may be modified from this circular shape, for example, may be transformed into a character icon.

FIG. 54(a) shows a pending icon in display mode A (default display mode). The display mode A (default display mode) is a non-patterned and white display mode. In the drawings, white is represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. The pending icon suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pre-reading notice depending on the display mode. In other words, it suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display in which the suspension represented by the suspension icon is digested. The display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. In addition, you may make it suggest that a big-hit expectation degree is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big win.

FIG. 54(b) shows a pending icon in display mode B. FIG. The display mode B is a non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawings, green is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is 25%.

FIG. 54(c) shows a pending icon in display mode C. FIG. The display mode C is a non-patterned and red display mode. In the drawings, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%.

FIG. 54(d) shows a pending icon in display mode D. FIG. The display mode D is a display mode consisting of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background. In the drawings, yellow is represented by vertical hatching. This display mode D is a display mode symbolizing the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the second display mode is a display mode in which many players imagine a specific pachinko machine manufacturer, and can be said to be a display mode in which the pachinko machine manufacturer can be recognized. In other words, it is a display mode famous for being used by a certain pachinko machine manufacturer. In addition, it can be said that it is a display mode unique to the pachinko machine manufacturer, or that if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can be said that it is a display mode in which the same manufacturer's pattern is commonly used across a plurality of models. This second display mode is called a maker pattern. Manufacturer patterns include animal patterns and other animal patterns, flower patterns, fruit and other plant patterns, fireworks patterns, striped patterns, checkered patterns, and other geometric patterns. A repeating pattern or the like in which the constituent units of are arranged regularly (or irregularly). In addition, since the maker pattern is a pattern expressed using a plurality of colors, it is included in "color" in a broad sense. It should be noted that there are cases where a single specific color symbolizes a pachinko machine manufacturer, and in this case it is the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 75%. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, it may be a pachinko machine sales maker (company), or it may be a model (model pattern) instead of the maker.

FIG. 54(e) shows a pending icon in display mode E. FIG. The display mode E is a rainbow display mode. The rainbow color is a mode in which each of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) that constitutes the rainbow is displayed by continuously changing one color at a time. However, here, it refers to a mode in which the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the display area. On the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the jackpot expectation is 100%. That is, it suggests a big hit decision.

In addition, as the display mode F, there may be further prepared a display mode which is a non-patterned and golden display mode and suggests that the degree of expectation for a big win is 70%.

In the five display modes described above, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the lower the frequency of appearance. good too. That is, the pending icon in the display mode D (manufacturer's design) may have the lowest appearance frequency.

In addition, the five display modes shown in FIG. 54 are also used for a variable icon in which the pending icon changes, and function as a notice (normal notice) of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable icon.

Furthermore, the star-shaped production lamp 206 provided directly under the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a light emission mode representing the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon.

The right end of FIG. 54 shows the lighting mode of the star-shaped production lamp 206 . The effect lamp 206 can emit light in a light emission mode A (white light emission mode) representing the display mode A (default display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. In addition, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emission mode B (green light emission mode) that represents the display mode B (green display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. In addition, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emission mode C (red light emission mode) that represents the display mode C (red display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. Furthermore, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode) that represents the display mode E (rainbow color display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. The rainbow-colored light-emitting mode of the production lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the light-emitting regions. These lighting modes also suggest the same degree of expectation of a big win as the display modes of the pending icon and the variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, that is, the color of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the light emission color of the production lamp 206 differ in hue because the display media are different. Both colors are described as being included in the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 is not provided with a light emission mode representing the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the effect lamp 206 emits light in the same or similar light emission mode as the manufacturer pattern. no.

In addition, as the light emission mode E, a gold light emission mode may be further prepared which suggests that the expectation of a big win is 70%.

Other displays (for example, title background display, etc.) on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. Also in other displays, the degree of expectation of the big win may be suggested by the display mode, or the display mode in the other displays may be irrelevant to the degree of expectation of the big win.

Also, the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (for example, the lord's kimono, etc.) may be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 54 excluding the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern). In the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 as well, the degree of expectation for the big win may be suggested depending on the display mode, or the degree of expectation for the big win may be irrelevant.

Also, lamps other than the effect lamp 206 (the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. 45) can emit light in a light emission mode representing a display mode other than the second display mode. For example, the light-emitting portion 71 provided on the first effect movable body 7 and the light-emitting diodes (not shown) arranged on the attacker unit 23 can emit light in white, green, red, and rainbow colors, respectively. In addition to the case where the 7 colors that make up the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the luminescent area, the luminescent color changes continuously one by one so that each of the 7 colors that make up the rainbow can be displayed. In some cases, it is displayed by light emission. Such rainbow color changing light emission may also be performed as the light emission mode D of the effect lamp 206 . The light emission mode of the lamps other than the production lamp 206 may also suggest the same degree of expectation for the big win as the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon, or the light emission mode of the lamps other than the production lamp 206 may indicate the degree of expectation for the big win. It may also be a light emission mode unrelated to.

Furthermore, except for display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) and display mode E (rainbow color), it is also used as the color of the decoration.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8. FIG.

In the second effect movable body 8 which imitates a person's right arm, four fingers other than the fifth finger (little finger) are decorations. All of these four fingers are invisible when they are bent, but when extended, the decoration provided on the palm side becomes visible.

FIG. 55(a) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 extended while the forearm 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55( a ), decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824 . That is, it is painted white.

FIG. 55(b) shows the second effect movable body 8 extending the third finger (middle finger) 823 with the forearm 82 lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55(b), decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. As shown in FIG. That is, it is painted green.

FIG. 55(c) shows the second effect movable body 8 extending the second finger (index finger) 822 while the forearm 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55(c), the palm side of the second finger 822 is decorated with a decoration C (red). That is, it is painted red.

FIG. 55(d) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the first finger (thumb) 821 extended while the forearm 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55(d), the palm side of the first finger 821 is decorated with a decoration D (gold). That is, it is painted gold.

In the second effect movable body 8, the palm side of the fifth finger (little finger) 825 is not decorated.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decoration are different here because the display media are different, but these colors are included in the same or similar range. described as being

Further, each decoration applied to the second effect movable body 8 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, like the pending icon and the variable icon. Therefore, when the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, it is suggested that the expectation of a big win is 5%, and when the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, the expectation of a big win is 25%. When the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, it is suggested that the expectation of a big win is 50%, and when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended, the expectation of a big win is suggested. is 70%.

On the other hand, as the decorations, the decorations with the maker's pattern and the rainbow-colored decorations are not provided. Therefore, in the advance notice by the decorative body, a high probability advance notice with a jackpot expectation of 75% or more is not performed.

It should be noted that although the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested in the same manner as the reserved icon and the variable icon, the value of the degree of expectation may be different from the value of the reserved icon and the variable icon. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) 60%, and decoration D (gold) 90%.

Returning to FIG. 53 and continuing the explanation, in FIG. The pending icon is also shown in dashed lines.

On the other hand, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and there is no reservation of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. This is because it is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds) and the winning to the special figure 2 starting port 232 does not make much sense. In the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in FIG. 53, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is still displayed as "x". .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 whose display result is more likely to be displayed is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in this embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), as described above, the display result of the special figure 1 is likely to be displayed , As shown in FIG. 53(a), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the control state is a probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state) If , On the contrary, the reserved icon display area of special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the pending icon of the special figure 2 is the same as the default display mode of the pending icon of the special figure 1, but may be different.

Also, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 53(a) is lit in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode), which is the light emission mode representing the display mode of the pending icons h11 and h12.

In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of variation start on the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the 4th symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the pending icon → start of variation of the decoration symbol. However, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 53(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. Further, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11, which was the first suspended icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG.

In FIG. 53(c), one ball is won in the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 is increasing. This increased pending icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second pending icon h12, and functions as a pre-reading notice. At the timing when the red (display mode C) pending icon h12 starts to be displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a dramatic sound (appearing sound) expressed in eighth notes. In addition, in response to the increase in the hold indicated by the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) is increased. The display mode of the pending icon h12 indicating the pending state is changed to the lighting mode C (red lighting mode). That is, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 206 is the same or similar to the red color of the pending icon h12. The timing for starting the display of the red (display mode C) pending icon h12 and the timing for changing the star-shaped production lamp 206 to the lighting mode C may be the same, or the pending icon h12 may be displayed earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster (the same applies up to the example shown in FIG. 60). In the drawing, the size of the pending icon h12 and the size of the production lamp 206 are approximately the same, but the production lamp 206 is actually larger. Therefore, if the production lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the reserved icon h12 and the change timing of the production lamp 206 is earlier, the player may be given a stronger expectation for the big win indicated by the red color. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is increased by one to become 2.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(d), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a losing decorative design combination, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In FIG. 53(e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. The pending icon in red (display mode C) is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first pending icon (holding icon h11). Also, the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(f), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4", which is a losing decorative design combination, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In FIG. 53(g), the suspension represented by the red (display mode C) suspension icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the red (display mode C) pending icon is displayed as the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 . Also, the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 53(h), the variable display of decorative patterns enters a reach state, and in FIG. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 53(i), the red (display mode C) variation icon h0 is hidden, and the star-shaped production lamp 206 is also turned off in accordance with the non-display of this variation icon h0. In FIGS. 53 to 58, the state in which the effect lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variation icon h0 is hidden and the timing at which the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is turned off may be the same, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies up to the example shown in FIG. 60). Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 53(j), it develops into super reach (old reach). A reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(j). Here, the reach title LT1 is displayed in black letters on a green background display as "jii reach". In this reach title LT1, the background is the same as or similar to green, which suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, with pending icons and decorations, but as shown in FIG. A background color other than green is not selected. That is, it can be said that the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not suggest the degree of expectation for the big win, and the green color does not suggest the degree of expectation for the big win.

The character of the old man appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(k), and then the animation of the character of the old man is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(l) following the animation display of the character of the old man, the character of the old man who looks depressed is displayed. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner, the shaking variation of the combination of the decorative symbols "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative patterns are combined in the left pattern display region 208a, the middle pattern display region 208b and the right pattern display region 208c. is displayed as stopped. In this case, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "434". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 53(m), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

The star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0 maintains the turned-off state until the decoration pattern is confirmed and displayed. (until timing), the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued. Alternatively, the light emission in the light emission mode C may be continued until the background display is switched and the variable display of the decorative pattern reduced and displayed at the lower right corner starts to shake and fluctuate (until the timing of FIG. 53(l)). Furthermore, the light emission in the light emission mode C may be continued until the final display of the decorative pattern is performed (until the timing of FIG. 53(m)).

The example shown in FIG. 53 described above is an example in which the display mode of the pending icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped production lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442, are related.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the reach title display are related.

FIG. 56 also shows the decorative design display device 208 and the production lamp 206. FIG. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 56(a), one special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the special figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and this special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode. is displayed. Also, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 56(a) is lit in the default lighting mode A (white lighting mode), which is the lighting mode representing the display mode of the pending icon h11.

In FIG. 56(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284 is changed from 1 to 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th symbol of the special figure 1. In addition, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11 that has been at the display position of the first suspended icon until then is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. When the default display form of the suspended icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), and the variable icon h0 is displayed. It is displayed in mode D (manufacturer pattern). The variable icon h0 changed to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) functions as a normal notice. The speaker 120 outputs an effect sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note in accordance with the timing of the display start of the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) (timing of the display mode change). In addition, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which has been emitting light in the default light emission mode A (white light emission mode) until now, changes to light emission mode C (red light emission mode). That is, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and does not emit light in the light emission mode of the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). . More specifically, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode that suggests a lower level of expectation for a big win than the level of expectation for a big win suggested by the display mode D of the variation icon h0. Note that the effect lamp 206 may change to a light emission mode (light emission mode D (rainbow color)) that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the display mode D of the variation icon h0 suggests, or may change to a light emission mode D (rainbow color). or a color that is not used in the variable icon, or the color that is used in the pending icon or the variable icon may be lighted in a different light emission mode (for example, red flashing light, etc.). Also, the timing for starting the display of the variable icon h0 and the timing for changing the effect lamp 206 may be the same, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, and the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies up to the example shown in FIG. 60). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are shown to be about the same as the pending icon, but the effect lamp 206 is actually larger. Therefore, if the production lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the variation icon h0 and the change timing of the production lamp 206 is earlier, the player first recognizes the degree of expectation for the big win indicated by the red color, and then the variation icon. By looking at the manufacturer's pattern of h0, the expectation of a big hit is further increased. In addition, since the production lamp 206 does not emit light in the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), the rarity of the highly anticipated maker's pattern is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker's pattern are improved. can increase

In FIG. 56(c), the variable display of decorative patterns enters a reach state, and in FIG. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 56(d), the variation icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is hidden, and the star-shaped production lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the variation icon h0. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 56(e), it has developed into Super Reach (Kengo Reach). A ready-to-win title LT2 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(e). Here, the reach title LT2 is displayed in black letters on a rainbow background display as "Kengo Reach". That is, the same display mode as the display mode used as the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the ready-to-win title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win. Also, the first performance movable body 7 arranged above the decorative pattern display device 208 is lowered to a position overlapping the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 on the front side thereof. Further, the rectangular light-emitting portion 71 arranged on the first effect movable body 7 is lit in a light-emitting mode D representing rainbow colors (rainbow-colored light-emitting mode). That is, the light-emitting portion 71 of the first effect movable body 7 emits light in the same or similar light-emitting mode as the rainbow color of the background display of the ready-to-win title LT2, suggesting the expectation of a big win. In addition, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode representing the display mode E (rainbow color), which is the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT2 is the same or similar to the display mode E (rainbow color), and for example, it is the same color as the display mode E (rainbow color) used as the display mode of the pending icon or the variable icon. Even if the shape of the display area is slightly different, if the player can imagine the display mode E (rainbow color), the display mode will be similar to the display mode E (rainbow color) (see FIG. 58(j) described later). (same for reach title LT3 in ).

The background color of this reach title LT2 is, as shown in FIG. The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the "red" jackpot is "35%", the expectation of the "manufacturer pattern" is "75%", and the expectation of the "rainbow" jackpot is " 100%”. In other words, unlike the above-mentioned "Jii-Reach", the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the type of background color of the Reach title LT2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the light emission color of the light emitting unit 71 is selected from "white", "red", and "rainbow color". is "20%", the expectation level of "red" is "45%", and the expectation level of "rainbow color" is "100%". In other words, unlike the background color type of the reach title LT2, the "manufacturer's pattern" is not set for the light emission color type of the light emitting unit 71. FIG. Note that the background color of the reach title LT2 and the light emission color of the light emitting unit 71 may be related to each other (the same color). However, even in that case, the "manufacturer's pattern" is not set as the light emission color of the light-emitting unit 71, and light is emitted in another color (for example, instead of the "manufacturer's pattern", "golden lighting" or " red flashing”).

In the state shown in FIG. 56(e), the descending first effect movable body 7 does not overlap the background display of the reach title LT2, but the first effect movable body 7 overlaps the background display. If the display mode of the background display is the manufacturer's design, the display can be lowered only to a position where it does not overlap the background display. Furthermore, not only the background display but also the suspended icon and variable icon of the maker's pattern are configured so that the effect movable body does not overlap.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be the manufacturer's pattern, but the light-emitting portion 71 in the first effect movable body 7 cannot be lit in the light-emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern. It may be so arranged that it cannot be lit even in a rainbow-colored light emission mode. In such a case, the light emitting unit 71 may remain turned off, or may emit light in a red light emission mode.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(f), display of an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the villain, the master swordsman, has started. This animation continues until FIG. 56(i). In FIG. 56(i), the lord of the main character wins against the enemy master swordsman, and in the reduced display of decorative patterns displayed in the lower right corner, the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" fluctuates. is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(j), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the combination of decorative designs is displayed in the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b and the right design display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/retained number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stop-displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stop-displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 56(j), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device by the zone effect.

FIG. 57 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the production lamp 206. FIG. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(a), the decorative design combination of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is displayed still. Moreover, the production lamp 206 shown in FIG. 57(a) is in a state of being extinguished. In addition, in this FIG. 57, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 arranged on the left side of the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 is also displayed. The sub-liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. 57(a) is in a state in which nothing is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 57(a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are Both are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 57(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, and the movement of the pending icon is also completed. The suspended icon is shifted one place to the right, and the suspended icon h11, which was the first suspended icon until then, is changed to the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 in the default display mode without changing the display mode in this example. is displayed as In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(b), the variable display of the decorative design is started in each of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c. A zone title ZT representing the title of the zone effect is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the pattern, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is difficult to see. The zone title ZT display is an oval with the words "Training Zone" in red letters on a solid blue background. In this zone title ZT, a "training zone" is written in a color identical to or similar to red, which suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, with a pending icon or decoration. However, this red color does not suggest the potential for a big win. That is, when the zone title ZT is displayed, it is always written in red letters as "training zone", and is never written in other colors as "training zone". It should be noted that neither the character color of reach title LT1 shown in FIG. May suggest. On the other hand, the maker's pattern only suggests the degree of expectation of the big win, and there is no case of not suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win. Therefore, the display of various settings (for example, the tone of the speaker 120, the game mode, etc.) that can be changed by the player on the gaming machine, the display of the number of games played, the number of consecutive jackpots, etc., do not use the manufacturer's pattern. do not have. When the maker pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big win is always suggested, and a big win can be expected with a fairly high probability. If a maker's pattern with a high expectation is used without suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, the player misunderstands that the degree of expectation for a big win is high and expects excessively. In the case of not suggesting a degree, by not using a maker pattern with a high expectation, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the expectation of a big win is high, and the expectation is excessively fueled. can be reduced.

In FIG. 57(b) where the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 has started to display the animation of the zone production, and the main character wearing a red kimono is displayed. An animation of the lord training in swordsmanship is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61(c), the color of this lord's kimono can be selected from "white", "green", "red" and "rainbow". The expectation level is "20%", the expectation level for the "green" jackpot is "30%", the expectation level for the "red" jackpot is "45%", and the expectation level for the "rainbow" jackpot is "100%". It has become. In addition, it is designed not to be displayed in the "manufacturer pattern". This animation continues until FIG. 57(i). In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 in the fourth pattern / reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. has started blinking.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(c), the background display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. This wilderness background display continues until FIG. 57(i). Also, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(c), the variable display of the decorative design performed in each of the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b, and the right design display area 208c can be visually recognized. . Also, in FIG. 57(c), one ball is won in the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 is increasing. This increased pending icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second pending icon, and functions as a pre-reading notice. At the timing when the green (display mode B) pending icon h12 starts to be displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a dramatic sound (appearing sound) represented by sixteenth notes. In this example, the production lamp 206 does not turn on in response to the increase in the suspension indicated by the green (fifth display mode) suspension icon h12, and the production lamp 206 remains off. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is increased by one to become 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(d), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a losing decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains extinguished.

In FIG. 57(e), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. The green (display mode B) suspended icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first suspended icon (suspended icon h11). Also, the star-shaped production lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(f), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 is still extinguished.

In FIG. 57(g), the suspension represented by the green (display mode B) suspension icon is digested, and the special figure 1 symbol variation display is started. That is, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the green (display mode B) pending icon is displayed as the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 . The star-shaped production lamp 206 that was in the off state is based on the suspension represented by the green (display mode B) suspension icon that has been displayed so far, according to the start of the symbol fluctuation display by the first special figure display device 212 , starts emitting light in a light emission mode B (green light emission mode) representing green (display mode B). That is, the effect lamp 206 starts emitting light in a light emitting mode in a color identical or similar to the green color of the variation icon h0. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not start to emit light until the change to be notified starts. The timing for starting the display of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 and the timing for starting the light emission of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 in the light emission mode B may be the same, or the variable icon h0 may be earlier. Alternatively, the production lamp 206 may be faster. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 57(h), the variable display of the decorative pattern enters into a ready-to-win state, but in this example, it does not develop into a super ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 3-Decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "434". Also, the green (fifth display mode) variation icon h0 is hidden when the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 ends. The end timing of the symbol variation display and the timing of the non-display of the variation icon h0 may be the same, the symbol variation display may be earlier, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier. In addition, the production lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the green (display mode B) variation icon h0.

The effect executed by the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (second display means) is not limited to the above-described animation display of the zone effect, and various effects may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed is changed again in the pseudo-continuous notice, the lord is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, and the color of the lord's kimono is used to suggest the degree of expectation for the big win. may Even in this case, the “manufacturer pattern” should not be displayed. In other words, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 does not display the “manufacturer pattern” under any circumstances. By not displaying the "manufacturer's pattern" on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in this way, the rarity of the highly anticipated maker's pattern is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker's pattern can be enhanced. . It should be noted that "pseudo-continuous advance notice" means an advance notice that the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special patterns corresponding to the lottery for one big win. This is an advance notice in which the variable display and the temporary stop display may be performed multiple times.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the pending icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related, and in which super reach is performed.

FIG. 58 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the production lamp 206. FIG. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(a), the combination of decorative designs "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 58(a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these two reserved icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are Both are displayed in the default display mode.

Also, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 58(a) is lit in a default light emission mode (white light emission mode), which is a light emission mode representing the display mode of the pending icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 58(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is changed from 2 to 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of special figure 1. Further, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11, which was the first suspended icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG.

In FIG. 58(c), one ball is won in the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of special figure 1 is increasing. This increased pending icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second pending icon h12, and functions as a pre-reading notice. At the timing when the red (display mode C) pending icon h12 starts to be displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a dramatic sound (appearing sound) expressed in eighth notes. Also, in this example, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 53, the star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) is replaced by the display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the increased hold. changes to the luminescence mode C (red luminescence mode). In addition, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is increased by one to become 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(d), the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8", which is a losing decorative pattern combination, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C.

In FIG. 58(e), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are displayed in variation. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th pattern / reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th pattern of the special figure 1. The pending icon in red (display mode C) is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first pending icon (holding icon h11). When the red pending icon (display mode C) is displayed at the display position of the first pending icon, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), and the pending icon h11 changes to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). ). In accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon, the speaker 120 outputs a production sound (change sound) expressed in quarter notes. On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the red light emission mode (light emission mode C) maintains that light emission mode, and the light emission mode does not change even if the display mode of the pending icon changes. The effect lamp 206, which is more conspicuous than the pending icon, does not change its luminous mode, but if you look closely, you can see the pending icon h11 in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) with the lowest appearance frequency, which is displayed by the player who discovers it. may greatly improve the interest in the game. Note that in response to the change of the pending icon h11 to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), the effect lamp 206 also changes to a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode representing the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) (e.g., light-emitting mode F (golden light emission mode))).

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(f), the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4", which is a losing decorative design combination, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed with the combination of "814". The pending icon h11 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C.

In FIG. 58(g), the suspension indicated by the suspension icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(g), variable display of decorative symbols has started, and the pending icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. In this example, when the suspended icon h11 in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode E (rainbow). , the variation icon h0 is displayed in the display mode E (rainbow color). The change icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) functions as a normal announcement of the finalization of the big win. At this timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon, the effect sound (change sound) represented by half notes is output from the speaker 120 . Further, in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color), the star-shaped production lamp 206, which has been emitting light in the light emission mode C until now, changes to the light emission mode D that represents the rainbow color (display mode E). (Rainbow color emission mode). That is, it starts to emit light in the same or similar color as the rainbow color of the variable icon h0. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th design/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th design of the special figure 1.

In this example, the display mode is changed from the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color). There is no change (change rate is 0%), and display mode E ( rainbow color). Alternatively, the rate of change from the other display mode to display mode E (rainbow color) may be higher than the rate of change from display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) to display mode E (rainbow color).

In FIG. 58(h), the variable display of decorative patterns enters a reach state, and in FIG. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. In FIG. 58(i), the variation icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). In this way, the production lamp 206 may continue to emit light even when the variation icon h0 is hidden only when it emits light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode) that confirms the big win. Note that the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or turn off based on the result of the effect lottery, regardless of the lighting mode. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 58(j), it has developed into super reach (front reach). The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color). Also, a reach title LT3 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(j). Here, the reach title LT3 is displayed with black letters on a rainbow colored background as "Mr. Reach". As shown in FIG. 61(a), the background color of this reach title LT3 is selected from "white", "red", "manufacturer pattern", and "rainbow color". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the "red" jackpot is "35%", the expectation of the manufacturer's pattern is "75%", the expectation of the "rainbow" jackpot is "100" %”. In other words, unlike the above-mentioned "Jii Reach", the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the type of background color of the Reach title LT3. Also, the lighting mode D (rainbow-colored lighting mode), which is the lighting mode of the production lamp 206, is the same or similar to the lighting mode of the background display in the reach title LT3.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(k) displays the animation of the character of Tono, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative patterns are combined in the left pattern display region 208a, the middle pattern display region 208b and the right pattern display region 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/retained number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stop-displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stop-displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 58(m), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect lamp 206, which continued to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) even after the start of super reach, emits light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) even during super reach. is continued, and even if the combination of decorative patterns is stop-displayed, the light emission is further continued, and the light emission in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) is continued until the subsequent big win game start performance is started. In addition, the effect lamp 206 may be turned off according to the end of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 .

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect in which the display mode of the pending icon and the display mode of the decoration provided on the second effect movable body 8 are related.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is also shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 59, the star-shaped production lamp 206 is omitted, and instead, the second production movable body 8 arranged on the right side of the decorative design display device 208 is shown. As for the production lamp, as described above, the light emission mode may be changed in accordance with the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon. Alternatively, in this example, the effect lamp 206 may remain turned off, or may remain in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 59(a), the combination of decorative designs of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 59(a), one special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the special figure 1 pending icon display area 281, and this special figure 1 pending icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode. is displayed.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59(a) is located at the initial position. The second effect movable body 8 positioned at the initial position does not overlap the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front side, and is in a position avoiding the display screen. facing downwards.

In FIG. 59(b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284 is changed from 1 to 0, and the blinking of the display of "-" is started in the 4th symbol of the special figure 1. In addition, the suspended icon is shifted to the right by one, and the suspended icon h11 that has been at the display position of the first suspended icon until then is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. FIG. The pending icon h11, which was in the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even when changed to the variable icon h0.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59(b) remains positioned at the initial position.

In the decorative design display device 208 where the variable display of the decorative design is started, the button effect is started. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 59(c), an operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed to prompt the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of Mr. Lord. The variable display of decorative symbols is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbols are changing by the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 and the like. . It should be noted that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation prompting notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 59(d), the effective period has decreased, and the player has pressed the effect button 136 in FIG. 59(e). When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, the success or failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, it means success. In the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. h0 is displayed. That is, the button effect is successful, and the normal notice is started. In accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the variation icon h0, the effect sound (change sound) represented by eighth notes is output from the speaker 120. FIG. Further, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit red light. If the button effect fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period. In addition to this, in the button effect, there are cases where a notice of entering the ready-to-win state is notified when successful.

As shown in FIG. 59(f), even if the success or failure result of the button effect is notified, the second effect movable body 8 is still positioned at the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 59(g), When entering a ready-to-win state in the variable display of decorative symbols, the second effect movable body 8 starts to operate. That is, the upper arm 81 starts rotating upward and the forearm 82 also starts rotating upward. As a result, the second effect movable body 8 begins to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 from the front side. In subsequent FIG. 59(h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared. As a result, the variation icon h0 in the display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm portion 81 of the second effect movable body 8 is further rotated upward, and the forearm portion 82 is greatly lifted. Note that the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the upper left mini-symbol continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 59(i), it has developed into a super reach (buttock reach). A reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 59(i). Here, the reach title LT4 is displayed with black letters on a red background display as "Mr. Reach". In addition, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59(i), the forearm 82 vibrates in a state in which the forearm 82 is lifted high, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, and decoration C (red) is displayed. is visible. This decoration C is a display mode representing red, which is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red) which is the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the degree of expectation of a big win. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decorative body of the second effect movable body 8 are the same or similar display modes, but they may be different display modes.

Also, the background display of the reach title LT4 may be in a display mode representing red. That is, the background display of the reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), and has a slightly different hue from the display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the pending icon or the variable icon, for example. However, if the player can imagine the display mode C (red), the display mode will be similar to the display mode C (red).

On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 59(j), animation of a buttocks character is displayed. The movable body 8 has started to return to the initial position. Next, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 59(k), a heroic character is displayed, and the second effect movable body 8 has returned to the initial position. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed. Although the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols are displayed. As for the mini symbols, variable display is continuously performed for any of the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 59(l), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the combination of decorative designs is displayed in the left design display area 208a, the middle design display area 208b and the right design display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/retained number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stop-displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stop-displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is not displayed in FIG. 59(l), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 moves shown in FIG. .

Figures 60(a) to 60(e) are the same as Figures 59(a) to 59(e), and button effects are executed.

Also in FIG. 60(f), the button effect is successful, and in the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 that has been changed from the default display mode to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs an effect sound (change sound) expressed in quarter notes in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the change icon h0. Note that the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may not emit light in the light emission mode representing the maker's pattern, but may emit light in the red light emission mode.

In subsequent FIG. 60(g), similarly to FIG. 59(g), in the variable display of decorative symbols, the ready-to-win state is entered, and the second effect movable body 8 has started its operation. It should be noted that, for example, when the variation icon h0 is displayed in the display mode B (green), the second effect movable body 8 may not operate and may remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the motion effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. may Also, when the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the second effect movable body is displayed more than when the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 59(g) is displayed. The motion presentation of 8 may be easily performed. In other words, it is preferable that the action effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed as the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher. In addition, when the display of the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is performed, the motion effect of the second effect movable body 8 may always be performed.

In FIG. 60(h), as in FIG. 59(h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display. It's becoming Also, as in FIG. 59(h), the forearm 82 of the second effect movable body 8 is greatly lifted.

In FIG. 60(i), it develops into a super reach (front reach), and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a reach title LT5. The display of the reach title LT5 here is written in black letters on the background display of the maker's pattern as "Mr. Reach". In addition, the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 60(j) vibrates the forearm 82 in a state where the forearm 82 is lifted high, like the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59(j). Furthermore, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, the decoration C is visible, but the decoration C is in the display mode showing red, and is different from the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) that was the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. are different modes of decoration. That is, in terms of the degree of expectation for a big hit, the decoration is one step lower. It should be noted that the first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended so that the decoration D (see FIG. 55(e)) with a 70% expectation of a big hit can be visually recognized. However, even in this case, the degree of expectation for a big hit (75%) suggested by display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is lower. Since the player can see the variable icon h0 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) with the lowest appearance frequency, and can also see the maker pattern in the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT5, In some cases, the player has a sufficiently hot feeling, and the decoration of the second effect movable body 8 can calm down the player's feelings a little.

Note that the background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT5 is the same or similar to the manufacturer pattern, and for example, the display pattern D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display form of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the shape of the polka dots are slightly different. Even if there is, if the player can imagine the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), the display mode will be similar to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern).

Figures 60(i) to 60(l) are the same as Figures 59(i) to 59(l). It will be displayed as a stop, and it will be a big hit.

FIG. 61(a) is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG.

The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the title background color determination table for reach shown in FIG. 61(a) in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. At this time, as described above, green is always selected as the background color of the reach title LT1 of "Grandfather Reach", and this background color does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of "kengo reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "dono reach" suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit, and the CPU 504 controls the first sub control unit 400 Determines the background color based on commands received from Both of the reach title LT2 of "Kengo Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Lord Reach" include the manufacturer's pattern in the background color. In both reach titles LT2 and LT3, a common relationship is used as the relationship between the background color and the degree of expectation for a big hit, but different relationships may be used.

FIG. 61(b) is a diagram showing the emission color determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-controller 400. As shown in FIG.

The CPU 0404 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the light emission color determination table shown in FIG. 61(b) in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 71 emission color is determined. The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 71 suggests the degree of expectation for the big win, and the CPU 404 determines the color of the light emitted based on the command received from the main control unit 300 . White, red, and rainbow colors are available for the luminescent colors, and there are no maker-specific luminescent colors. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the red luminescent color and the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the red background color of the reach title are different in magnitude. Furthermore, the degree of expectation is different from the degree of expectation for a big hit suggested by the red display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon described with reference to FIG. 54 .

FIG. 61(c) is a diagram showing the lord's kimono color determination table stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-controller 500. As shown in FIG.

This determination table is a table for determining the color of the lord's kimono to be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in the zone rendering described with reference to FIG. As with the determination of the background color described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 selects the lord's kimono based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 51(a). determine the color of At this time, the decision table shown in FIG. 61(c) is used. As described above, the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, so the manufacturer's pattern is not prepared for the color of the kimono of the lord. The color of the lord's kimono also suggests the degree of expectation for the big win.

In the above description, the sound effects such as the appearance sound of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the sound of the display mode change are output from the speaker 120. A sound effect is output (Fig. 57(c)), and a short sound effect of an eighth note corresponding to the display mode C (red) is output (Fig. 53(c), Fig. 58(c), Fig. 59 ( f)), corresponding to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), a longer quarter note effect sound is output (FIGS. 56(b), 58(e), and 60(f)), and the display mode E ( Rainbow color), the longest half note effect sound was output (FIG. 58(g)). That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the longer the output time of the effect sound is output. Although the effect sound was different for each display mode, a display mode with a relatively high expectation of a big hit (display mode D and display mode E, which is higher than 50%) and a display with a relatively low expectation of a big win. The effect sound may differ between modes (display mode B and display mode C of 50% or less). That is, the special effect sound may be output only when the expectation of the big hit is relatively high. Furthermore, only for the appearance sound of the pending icon or variable icon in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) and the changing sound to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), a specific effect sound different from that in other display modes is output. You may make it The specific effect sound here may be a sound effect related to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) or a sound effect representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern). For example, when the maker pattern is an animal pattern, , the cry of the animal patterned animal may be output as the specific effect sound.

Further, in the above description, the text color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 53(j) and the text color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. , the background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 56(e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 58(j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. The background display of the reach title LT5 suggested the degree of expectation for the big win. However, the display mode of the title characters may suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and in this case, the title characters are displayed in different display modes according to the degree of expectation of the big win. . On the contrary, the background display of the title may not suggest the degree of expectation of the big win, and in this case, the background display of the title is always displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title characters and background display, the display mode of the cut-in notice display characters, background display, and frame display, or the display mode of the dialogue notice characters, background display, and balloon line display, The degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the display mode (color or pattern) of the variation icon. For example, in these notices, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern) appears. On the other hand, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demonstration effect.

Also, during the jackpot game, the light emitting means (the effect lamp 206, the light emitting portion 71 of the first effect movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, The right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, the game frame lamps 452 such as the button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light emission mode. Therefore, unless the symbol variation display is being performed, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode (light emitting mode D) may not suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. It should be noted that even during the jackpot game, the light-emitting means does not emit light in the light-emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern (display mode D).

Also, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be higher in the second game state (eg, special figure high probability state) than in the first game state (eg, special figure low probability state). In addition, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed by the player's setting operation, but if it is a specification that can be changed in the custom mode, it can be changed in the first mode (for example, the non-custom mode (normal mode )), the appearance frequency of the maker's pattern may be higher in the second mode (for example, custom mode).

In addition, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when hitting right in a special figure low probability state, it takes a long time until the result of the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. It may be possible that the maker pattern may appear in a special figure high probability state in which a small hit rush can be expected without appearing. Alternatively, in a 1 type 2 type mixed machine that wins V via a small win, the maker pattern does not appear in the variable performance that wins a small win in the normal game state, and the small win is won in the time-saving game state. In the variable presentation, the maker pattern may appear.

Also, although the appearance frequency of the maker pattern is the lowest, its appearance frequency may be the same as the appearance frequency of the rainbow color. Alternatively, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be lower than the appearance frequency of red but higher than the appearance frequency of rainbow. It should be noted that, as described above, this appearance frequency may be changeable by the player's setting operation.

Further, what has been displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 instead of the decorative pattern display device 208. - 特許庁

Further, as display means in place of the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 is installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. may This light guide plate is an optical member that emits forward light incident from the side. A pattern can be displayed. Even when a light guide plate is used instead of the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the maker pattern is not displayed.

53 to 60, white, green, red, gold, rainbow color, maker pattern, Although blue, which does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit, is used for description, other colors and patterns may be used.

In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon, the default display mode will not change to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). In this case, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or the display mode C (red) may be changed. and display mode B (green). Conversely, while the default display mode is not changed to the display mode E (rainbow color), the default display mode may be changed to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). good. In this case, the display mode E (rainbow color) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green). may be made possible. Also, the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) may be changed from the default display mode, from the display mode C (red), and from the display mode B (green).

As described above, various effects using colors have been described. ), light emitting means (effect lamp 206, light emitting portion 71 of first effect movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in attacker unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R , upper frame lamp 122U, game frame lamp 452 such as button lamp 138, etc.), a predetermined color displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 (lord's kimono), and a second effect movable body Strictly speaking, the predetermined colors of the decorations of the decorations provided in 8 are different in each display because the display media and effects are different.

However, even if the colors are slightly different, if the player can imagine the "predetermined color" (for example, red), the "predetermined color" of each display represents the same "predetermined color". It can also be said that it is the same or similar "predetermined color".

FIG. 62 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the front side (player's side).

This slot machine 1000 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001 . Three reels (a left reel 1010, a middle reel 1011, and a right reel 1012) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 62) are housed in the center of the main body 1001. It is configured so that it can rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on belt-like members at equal intervals, and these belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 1010 to 1012. . As for the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown in FIG. 62) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, near each of the reels 1010 to 1012, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

A winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line 1014 . A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five prize lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal prize line and a lower horizontal prize line are added. When 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line are valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right The five lines of the downward winning line and the right upward winning line may be effective as the winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. A reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, and when the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted. Three pieces are put in. The bet button 1032 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the prescribed number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. Insertion includes both. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 . The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

A start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012 . That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, an internal lottery process is executed to determine which of a plurality of types of winnings is won based on the operation of the start lever 1035, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively favorable or relatively unfavorable state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 . The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012, respectively. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The payout button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals placed on the bet and ejecting them from the medal payout port 1055 . The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with an operation key unit 1090 which is the same as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, there is provided a production button 1091 which is the same as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. luminous.

A sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A production device 1080 is arranged above the front door 1002 . This production device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 consisting of two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, a liquid crystal display device 1057 arranged behind the door member 1063, It has the same effect movable body 1058 as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. When opened, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (on the player's side), and the effect movable body 1058 appears on the right side. Light-emitting diodes (not shown) capable of emitting full-color light are arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b. Also, the effect movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with the decorative body described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. A display device or the like may be used. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, the display screen may be curved.

It should be noted that a sub-liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 1057 in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG.

On the liquid crystal display device 1057 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device, display modes A to E are displayed, such as character display of the title, background display of the title, background display of the notice, frame display of the notice, and character display of the notice. Used. That is, the display of the maker's pattern in the display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of the display mode A to the display mode E is a suggestive image suggesting the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state and the degree of expectation for bonus acquisition. In addition, the side lamp 1044, the light-emitting diodes (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, and the button lamp (not shown) that causes the effect button 1091 to emit light can emit light in light emission modes A to E. However, it does not emit light in the lighting mode that represents the manufacturer's design.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In an enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means to the game area can be ejected from the game area and supplied to the ejection means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, as shown in FIG. The ball reservoir dish 126 shown is not provided. This enclosed pachinko machine encloses balls, circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine, uses the enclosed balls as launch balls, and pays out the balls by credit. may be

According to the above description,
"Suggestion images that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, the degree of expectation of a big win, the degree of expectation of shifting to AT state, the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.] , title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] ,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emitting modes [for example, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. Lamps 442 (see FIG. 45), left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, button lamp 138, etc. shown in FIG. Side lamp 1044, light-emitting diodes (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and left door 1063b, button lamps (not shown) that cause the effect button 1091 to emit light],
A game machine comprising
The display means displays the suggestive image in a first display form [for example, a white display form shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 61(a), a green display form shown in FIG. c), red display mode shown in FIG. 61(a), etc.],
The display means can display the suggestive image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 54(d) and 61(a)]. is a
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 75%] than the first display mode,
The light-emitting means has a first light-emitting mode representing the first display mode [for example, white light-emitting mode shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 61(b), green light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 54(c), red light emission mode shown in FIG. 61(b), etc.],
The light-emitting means does not emit light in a second light-emitting mode representing the second display mode [for example, a light-emitting mode of green and yellow polka dots on a white background].
[For example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42, a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62]. 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode can be enhanced.

The degree of expectation may be an expectation of a big hit.

Further, the light emitting means may be a board lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light-emitting body provided on an accessory such as movable means.

Further, even if the first light emission mode is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Furthermore, the light-emitting means does not emit light in a light-emitting mode generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

Further, the display means can display the suggestive image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode is a display suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than the fourth display mode. It may be an aspect. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 0%. Alternatively, a display mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation may be used.

again,
``The display means can display the suggestive image in a third display mode [for example, the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 54(e) and FIG.
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 100%] than the second display mode,
The light-emitting means may emit light in a third light-emitting mode representing the third display mode [for example, a rainbow-colored light-emitting mode shown in FIGS. 54(e) and 61(b)]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first light emission mode is a light emission mode that is the same as or similar to the first display mode,
The second light emission mode is the same or similar light emission mode as the second display mode,
The third light emission mode is the same or similar light emission mode as the third display mode,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the first display mode, the second light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the second display mode, and the third light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the second display mode. The light emission mode may be a light emission mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first luminescence mode and the first display mode differ only due to the difference in media such as the luminescence means and the display means, the first luminescence mode is the same as the first luminescence mode. It can be said that the light emission mode is the same as the display mode, and the third light emission mode can be said to be the same light emission mode as the third display mode.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode using multiple colors [e.g., yellow and green],
The third display mode is also a display mode using multiple colors [e.g., seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 100%,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests a big hit.

again,
"The second display mode is a display mode [e.g., manufacturer's pattern or manufacturer's color] that symbolizes the manufacturing company or sales company of the gaming machine.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturing company or sales company of the game machine can be recognized.

According to the above description,
"Suggestion images that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, the degree of expectation of a big win, the degree of expectation of shifting to AT state, the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.] , title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. liquid crystal display device 1057 etc.],
Moving means that has a movable area on the player side of the display means [for example, the first effect movable body 7 and second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 44, the right door 1063a and left door 1063b shown in FIG. body 1058] and
A game machine comprising
The display means displays the suggestive image in a first display form [for example, a white display form shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 61(a), a green display form shown in FIG. c), red display mode shown in FIG. 61(a)],
The display means can display the suggestive image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 54(d) and 61(a)]. is a
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 75%] than the first display mode,
The movable means has a first decoration according to a display mode representing the first display mode [for example, a white decoration shown in FIG. 55(a), a green decoration shown in FIG. ) includes the red decoration shown in
The movable means does not include a second decoration [for example, decoration of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background] in a display mode representing the second display mode [for example, FIG. reference],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode can be enhanced. Further, since the movable means whose movable area is closer to the player than the display means does not include the second decoration, misunderstanding that the second display mode has appeared can be prevented. It is possible to reduce the excessive stimulation of feelings.

The degree of expectation may be an expectation of a big hit.

Also, the movable means may be an effect movable means (accessory).

Moreover, even if the first decoration is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Furthermore, the movable means is not provided with decorations that are generally recognized to have a relationship with the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part painted with a color or pattern. In other words, it may be a portion that does not change in color or pattern. Alternatively, it may be a part (liquid crystal display device, light-emitting diode, etc.) that displays colors or patterns, or a part that can display by changing colors or patterns.

Further, the display means can display the suggestive image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode is a display suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than the fourth display mode. It may be an aspect. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 0%. Alternatively, a display mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation may be used.

again,
``The display means can display the suggestive image in a third display mode [for example, the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 54(e) and FIG.
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher [for example, 100%] than the second display mode,
The movable means does not include a third decoration [for example, rainbow-colored decoration] in a display mode representing the third display mode [see, for example, FIG. 55],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The movable means is provided with a first portion [for example, the second finger (index finger) 822] on which a display in a display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means can take a state in which the first portion is invisible to the player and a state in which the first portion is visible to the player, and the movable means represents the second display mode. It may not be provided with the second portion on which the display in the display mode is displayed. Further, the movable means may not be provided with the third part where the display in the display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 55).

again,
"The first decoration is a decoration with a display mode that is the same as or similar to the first display mode,
The second decoration is a decoration with a display mode that is the same as or similar to the second display mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the third decoration is a decoration with a display mode identical to or similar to the third display mode. 』
also explained.

The first decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the first display mode, the second decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the second display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration according to a display mode related to the second display mode. The third decoration may be a decoration according to a display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first decoration and the first display mode are only different due to the difference in media such as the movable means and the display means, the first decoration is the first display mode. It can be said that it is the same display mode as .

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode using a plurality of colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using a plurality of colors.

Furthermore, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is 100%.

again,
"The movable means displays the suggestive image in the second display mode rather than when the suggestive image in the first display mode is displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 59(g)]." If it is [for example, FIG. 60 (g)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``A game machine, wherein the second display mode is a display mode symbolizing a manufacturing company or a sales company of the game machine. 』
also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturing company or sales company of the game machine can be recognized.

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. In addition, even if a constituent element is included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modifications, and various examples described above, the constituent element may be used in other embodiments, examples, and modifications. or various examples. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it is established as a unified technical idea.

100 pachinko machine 106 front frame door 124 game area 126 ball storage tray 136 production button 190 operation key unit 191 upper button 192 lower button 200 game board 201 game board 206 production lamp 207 sub-liquid crystal display device 208 decorative pattern display device 210 normal pattern display Device 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 228 Normal figure start opening 23 Attacker unit 234 First variable winning opening, variable winning opening 2341 Door member 235 Second variable winning opening 2351 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROMs
308 RAM
400 first sub-controller 404 CPU
406 ROMs
408 RAM
500 Second sub-controller 504 CPU
506 ROMs
508 memory 7 first effect movable body 71 light emitting portion 8 second effect movable body 81 upper arm portion 82 forearm portion 821 first finger (thumb)
822 second finger (index finger)
823 third finger (middle finger)
824 4th finger (ring finger)
825 fifth finger (little finger)
h11, h12 hold icon h0 variable icon LT1 to LT5 reach title ZT zone title MC music selection display MD music selection determination display LH1 left-handed first display LH2 left-handed second display RH1 right-handed first display RH2 right-handed second display

Some of such game machines are provided with vibrating means.

However, the conventional game machines have room for improvement with respect to the vibrating means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic vibrating means.

The amusement machine of the present invention that solves the above object is
a first vibrating means capable of performing a first vibrating motion;
display means capable of displaying a first image associated with the first vibrating means ;
A game machine comprising
The first vibrating means is capable of starting execution of the first vibrating action after the first image is displayed,
The display means is capable of displaying an image related to the result of the suitability determination after displaying the first image,
a first case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a first timing after starting display of the first image; and a second timing at a second timing later than the first timing. There are a second case in which the vibrating motion is performed and a third case in which the first vibrating motion is not performed even if the display of the first image is started,
In the first case, the display means can display the certain image after starting to display the first image, and in the second case, the display means has started to display the first image. The certain image can be displayed later, and in the third case, the certain image is not displayed after starting the display of the first image;
The first vibrating means terminates the first vibrating operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case. is
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic vibrating means.

According to the above description,
"First vibrating means [eg, upper effect device 2] capable of executing a first vibrating motion [eg, character vibration effect A];
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg] related to the first vibration means;
A game machine comprising
The first vibrating means is capable of starting execution of the first vibrating motion after the first image is displayed [for example, FIG. 22 (6)];
The display means is capable of displaying an image related to the result of the success/failure judgment [for example, an effect display of "great chance"] after displaying the first image [for example, FIG. 22 (6)],
a first case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, timing at the time of super reach development in FIG. 22(4)]; A second case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a second timing later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the development of super reach (the timing of FIG. 22 (6))]; There is a third case [for example, FIG.
In the first case, the display means can display the certain image after starting to display the first image, and in the second case, the display means has started to display the first image. The certain image can be displayed later [eg, FIG. 22(6)], and in the third case, the certain image is not displayed after starting the display of the first image [eg, FIG. (6′)],
The first vibrating means terminates the first vibrating operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case. is
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.
Also, according to the above description,
"First vibrating means [eg, upper effect device 2] capable of executing a first vibrating motion [eg, character vibration effect A];
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208];
A game machine comprising
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibrating means [for example, a vibration effect related image 2hg] before the execution of the first vibrating motion is started. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The amusement machine of the present invention that solves the above object is
a first vibrating means capable of performing a first vibrating motion;
display means capable of displaying a first image associated with the first vibrating means;
A game machine comprising
The first vibrating means is capable of starting execution of the first vibrating action after the first image is displayed,
The display means is capable of displaying an image related to the result of the suitability determination after displaying the first image,
a first case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a first timing after starting display of the first image; and a second timing at a second timing later than the first timing. There are a second case in which the vibrating motion is performed and a third case in which the first vibrating motion is not performed even if the display of the first image is started,
In the first case, the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image, and in the second case, the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image. displaying an image, and in the third case, not displaying the image after starting to display the first image;
The first vibrating means terminates the first vibrating operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case. is
It is characterized by

According to the above description,
"First vibrating means [eg, upper effect device 2] capable of executing a first vibrating motion [eg, character vibration effect A];
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg] related to the first vibration means;
A game machine comprising
The first vibrating means is capable of starting execution of the first vibrating motion after the first image is displayed [for example, FIG. 22 (6)];
The display means is capable of displaying an image related to the result of the success/failure judgment [for example, an effect display of "great chance"] after displaying the first image [for example, FIG. 22 (6)],
a first case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, timing at the time of super reach development in FIG. 22(4)]; A second case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a second timing later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the development of super reach (the timing of FIG. 22 (6))]; There is a third case [for example, FIG.
In the first case, the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image, and in the second case, the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image. display an image [eg, FIG. 22(6)], and in the third case, do not display the certain image after starting to display the first image [eg, FIG. 22(6') ] and
The first vibrating means terminates the first vibrating operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case. is
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.
Also, according to the above description,
"First vibrating means [eg, upper effect device 2] capable of executing a first vibrating motion [eg, character vibration effect A];
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208];
A game machine comprising
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibrating means [for example, a vibration effect related image 2hg] before the execution of the first vibrating motion is started. , a game machine characterized by: 』
also explained.

Claims (5)

a first vibrating means capable of performing a first vibrating motion;
display means;
A game machine comprising
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibrating means before execution of the first vibrating action is started.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
The display means terminates display of the first image before execution of the first vibrating motion is started.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The first vibrating means is capable of executing a second vibrating operation,
The display means does not display the first image before execution of the second vibration operation is started.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 3,
The first vibrating motion vibrates for a longer period of time than the second vibrating motion,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
comprising a second vibration means different from the first vibration means;
The second vibrating means is capable of executing a third vibrating operation,
The display means does not display an image related to the second vibrating means before execution of the third vibrating action is started.
A playground characterized by:

Images